HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Unit 3 Polynomial, Functions, Expressions, And Equations

Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Unit 3 Polynomial, Functions, Expressions, And Equations

Page 232 Problem 1 Answer

A table is given with some statements written in one column. It is asked to write the terms for those statements in another column.

Factor is a number or expression that divides a product exactly.

For example, 3x divides 6x2 and gives the quotient 2x. So, 3x is the factor of 6x2.

A rational or irrational number is always a real number. For example, 1/2 is a rational number.

Here, 1/2=0.5. Thus, it is a real number.

A number, variable, product, or quotient in expression is called as term.

For example: in the expression, 3x+2, 3xand 2are the terms of the binomial 3x+2.

Parameters are the constants in a function or equation that may be changed. For example, in the equation,x=2t+1, t is the parameter.

A change in the size, position, or shape of a figure of graph is called as transformation.

Transformations are of four types mainly, Reflection, Translation, Stretch, Compression.A numerical factor in a term of an algebraic expression is known as coefficients.

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Unit 3 Polynomial, Functions, Expressions, And Equations

For example, in the expression, 3×2+5, 3 is the coefficient of x2.

The table with complete statements is given below:

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Unit 3 Polynomial, Functions, Expressions And Equations 1

The table with review words is given by,

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Unit 3 Polynomial, Functions, Expressions And Equations 1 1

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 Unit 3 Polynomial Functions Overview

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Unit 3 Polynomial, Functions, Expressions, And Equations Page 232 Problem 2 Answer

It is given an incomplete statement, “A polynomial function of degree 3 is a ____.”

It is required to complete the statement.

The degree of a polynomial is the highest of the degrees of the polynomial’s monomials (individual terms) with non-zero coefficients.

The polynomial having degree 3 are cubic polynomial function. For example: 3×3+2×2+1is a cubic polynomial function.

A polynomial function of degree 3 is a cubic polynomial function.

The complete sentence is, A polynomial function of degree 3 is a cubic polynomial function.

HMH Algebra 2 Unit 3 Polynomial Expressions And Equations Solutions

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Unit 3 Polynomial, Functions, Expressions, And Equations Page 232 Problem 3 Answer

It is given an incomplete statement, “A ___________of a polynomial is a zero of the function associated with that polynomial.”

It is required to complete the statement. A factor of a polynomial is a zero of the function associated with that polynomial.

A factor of a polynomial is a zero of the function associated with that polynomial.

HMH Algebra 2 Unit 3 Polynomial Functions Key

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Module 3 Chapter 3 Exercise 3.3 Quadratic Equations

Quadratic Equations in HMH Algebra 2 (1st Edition, Module 3, Chapter 3, Exercise 3.3)

Page 139 Problem 1 Answer

  • The complex solutions of a quadratic equation can be calculated either by completing the square, or by using the quadratic formula.
  • To complete the square and calculate the complex solutions of a quadratic equation, first the equation is rewritten in the form x2+bx=c. Next, the value of b is identified, and (b/2)2 is calculated.
  • The value of (b/2)2 is added on both sides of the rewritten equation, and the left-side of the equation is factorised.

Finally, the definition of square root is used, and the equation is solved for the required values of x.

To use the quadratic formula and calculate the complex solutions of a quadratic equation, the equation is rewritten in the form ax2+bx+c=0

and the values of a,b,c are written. Then, the values of a,b,c are substituted in the quadratic formula and the expression is simplified to determine the required values of x.

To calculate the complex solutions of a quadratic equation, the completing the square method or the quadratic formula are used.

To calculate the complex solutions of a quadratic equation by completing the square, rewrite the quadratic equation in the form x2+bx=c, calculate the value of (b/2)2, add (b/2)2 on both sides of the rewritten equation, factor the left-side of the equation, use the definition of square root, and finally, solve the resulting equation for x.

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Module 3 Chapter 3 Exercise 3.3 Quadratic Equations

Quadratic Equations in HMH Algebra 2 (1st Edition, Module 3, Chapter 3, Exercise 3.3) Page 139 Problem 2 Answer

  • The given table shows three quadratic equations of the form ax2+bx+c=0.
  • The question requires to complete the given table.
  • To complete the given table, rewrite the equations using subtraction to fill the second column.
  • Then, use the left and right sides of the rewritten equations to determine the expressions for f(x) and g(x), and use them to fill the third and fourth columns of the table.
  • The first given quadratic equation is 2x2+4x+1=0.
  • Subtract 1 from both sides of the equation to rewrite it in the form ax2+bx=−c.

​2x2+4x+1−1=0−12x2+4x=−1

The left-hand side of the equation is of the form ax2+bx. Equating the left-hand side of the rewritten equation to f(x), the obtained function is f(x)=2x2+4x.

The right-hand side of the equation is of the form −c. Equating the right-hand side of the rewritten equation to g(x), the obtained function is g(x)=−1.

The second given quadratic equation is 2x2+4x+2=0                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     

Subtract 2 from both sides of the equation to rewrite it in the form ax2+bx=−c.

​2x2+4x+2−2=0−2

2x2+4x=−2

The left-hand side of the equation is of the form ax2+bx. Equating the left-hand side of the rewritten equation to f(x), the obtained function is f(x)=2x2+4x.

The right-hand side of the equation is of the form −c. Equating the right-hand side of the rewritten equation to g(x), the obtained function is g(x)=−2.

The third given quadratic equation is 2x2+4x+3=0.

Subtract 3 from both sides of the equation to rewrite it in the form ax2+bx=−c.

2x2+4x+3−3=0−3

2x2+4x=−3​

The left-hand side of the equation is of the form ax2+bx. Equating the left-hand side of the rewritten equation to f(x), the obtained function is f(x)=2x2+4x.

The right-hand side of the equation is of the form −c. Equating the right-hand side of the rewritten equation to g(x), the obtained function is g(x)=−3.

Complete the table using the rewritten equations, and the obtained expressions for f(x) and g(x).

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 3 Quadratic Equations 2

The completed table is:

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 3 Quadratic Equations 2 1

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 Module 3 Chapter 3 Exercise 3.3 solutions

Quadratic Equations in HMH Algebra 2 (1st Edition, Module 3, Chapter 3, Exercise 3.3) Page 139 Problem 3 Answer

The given graph shows the graph of the function f(x)=2x2+4x.

The question requires to graph each g(x) and then complete the given table.

Given the following table, as completed in the previous part of this exercise

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 3 Quadratic Equations 3

To draw the graph and complete the given table, write the functions g(x)

to be graphed, and then graph them on the given graph using horizontal lines.

Then, use the points of intersection of f(x) and g(x)=−1 to determine the number of points where they are equal.

Then, use the expressions for the two functions, and rewrite the equation with 0 on one side.

Next, use the number of points of intersection to write the number of real solutions of the obtained equation.

Similarly, find the points of intersection, and thus the number of real solutions of the remaining two equations, and complete the table.

The graph of a constant function g(x)=a is a horizontal line having the y-intercept a.

From the completed table from previous part of the exercise, it can be determined that functions to be graphed are:​

g(x)=−1

g(x)=−2

g(x)=−3

Graph the functions on the given graph by drawing horizontal lines having the y-intercept equal to the right-hand side of the equation.

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 3 Quadratic Equations 3 1

From the graph, it can be observed that the graph of f(x) and g(x)=−1intersect each other at two points.

This means that 2x2+4x=−1 for two real values of x.

Adding 1 on both sides, the equation becomes 2x2+4x+1=0.

Therefore, the equation 2x2+4x+1=0 has two real solutions.

From the graph, it can be observed that the graph of f(x) and g(x)=−2 touch each other at one point.

This means that 2x2+4x=−2 for one real value of x.

Adding 2 on both sides, the equation becomes 2x2+4x+2=0.

Therefore, the equation 2x2+4x+2=0 has one real solution.

From the graph, it can be observed that the graph of f(x) and g(x)=−3

do not touch or intersect each other at any point.This means that 2x2+4x=−3 for no real value of x.

Adding 3 on both sides, the equation becomes 2x2+4x+3=0.

Therefore, the equation 2x2+4x+3=0 has no real solutions.

Complete the table using the determined number of real solutions of each equation.

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 3 Quadratic Equations 3 2

The required graph of each g(x) on the given graph is:

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 3 Quadratic Equations 3 3

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 3 Quadratic Equations 3 4

Quadratic Equations in HMH Algebra 2 (1st Edition, Module 3, Chapter 3, Exercise 3.3) Page 139 Problem 4 Answer

The given tables show three quadratic equations of the form ax2+bx+c=0. The given graph shows the graph of the function f(x) equal to −2x2+4x.

The question requires to complete the two given tables and graph the functions g(x).

To complete the first given table, rewrite the equations using subtraction to fill the second column.

Then, use the left and right sides of the rewritten equations to determine the expressions for f(x)

and g(x), and use them to fill the third and fourth columns of the table.

To draw the graph and complete the second given table, write the functions g(x) to be graphed, and then graph them on the given graph using horizontal lines.

Then, use the points of intersection of f(x)and g(x)=1 to determine the number of points where they are equal.

Then, use the expressions for the two functions, and rewrite the equation with 0 on one side.

Next, use the number of points of intersection to write the number of real solutions of the obtained equation.

Similarly, find the points of intersection, and thus the number of real solutions of the remaining two equations, and complete the second table.

The first given quadratic equation is −2x2+4x−1=0.

Add 1 on both sides of the equation to rewrite it in the form ax2+bx=−c.

−2x2+4x−1+1=0+1

−2x2+4x=1

The left-hand side of the equation is of the form ax2+bx. Equating the left-hand side of the rewritten equation to f(x), the obtained function is f(x)=−2x2+4x.

The right-hand side of the equation is of the form −c. Equating the right-hand side of the rewritten equation to g(x), the obtained function is g(x)=1.

The second given quadratic equation is −2x2+4x−2=0.

Add 2 on both sides of the equation to rewrite it in the form ax2+bx=−c.

​−2x2+4x−2+2=0+2

−2x2+4x=2

The left-hand side of the equation is of the form ax2+bx. Equating the left-hand side of the rewritten equation to f(x), the obtained function is f(x)=−2x2+4x.

The right-hand side of the equation is of the form −c. Equating the right-hand side of the rewritten equation to g(x), the obtained function is g(x)=2.

The third given quadratic equation is −2x2+4x−3=0.

Add 3 on both sides of the equation to rewrite it in the form ax2+bx=−c.

​−2x2+4x−3+3=0+3

−2x2+4x=3

The left-hand side of the equation is of the form ax2+bx. Equating the left-hand side of the rewritten equation to f(x), the obtained function is f(x)=−2x2+4x.

The right-hand side of the equation is of the form −c. Equating the right-hand side of the rewritten equation to g(x), the obtained function is g(x)=3.

Complete the first table using the rewritten equations, and the obtained expressions for f(x) and g(x).

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 3 Quadratic Equations 4

The graph of a constant function g(x)=a is a horizontal line having the y-intercept a.

From the completed table from previous part of the exercise, it can be determined that functions to be graphed are:

g(x)=1

g(x)=2

g(x)=3

​Graph the functions on the given graph by drawing horizontal lines having the y-intercept equal to the right-hand side of the equations.

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 3 Quadratic Equations 4 1

From the graph, it can be observed that the graph of f(x) and g(x)=1intersect each other at two points.

This means that −2x2+4x=1 for two real values of x.

Subtracting 1 from both sides, the equation becomes −2x2+4x−1=0.

Therefore, the equation −2x2+4x−1=0 has two real solutions.

From the graph, it can be observed that the graph of f(x) and g(x)=2 touch each other at one point.

This means that −2×2+4x=2 for one real value of x.

Subtracting 2 from both sides, the equation becomes −2x2+4x−2=0.

Therefore, the equation −2x2+4x−2=0 has one real solution.

From the graph, it can be observed that the graph of f(x) and g(x)=3 do not touch or intersect each other at any point.This means that −2x2+4x=3 for no real value of x.

Subtracting 3 from both sides, the equation becomes −2x2+4x−3=0.

Therefore, the equation −2x2+4x−3=0 has no real solutions.

Complete the table using the determined number of real solutions of each equation.

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 3 Quadratic Equations 4 2

The completed first table is:

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 3 Quadratic Equations 4 3

The required graph of each g(x) on the given graph is:

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 3 Quadratic Equations 4 4

HMH Algebra 2 Module 3 Chapter 3 Quadratic Equations Exercise 3.3 answers

Quadratic Equations in HMH Algebra 2 (1st Edition, Module 3, Chapter 3, Exercise 3.3) Page 140 Problem 5 Answer

It is given that the minimum value of f(x) noticed from steps A and B of Explore 1 is −2.

The given table shows the values of g(x), and the corresponding number of real solutions of f(x)=g(x).

The question requires to complete the given table.

Given the following graph, as drawn in step B of Explore 1:

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 3 Quadratic Equations 5

To complete the given table, use the graph to determine the number of points of intersection of f(x) and g(x)=−2, and write the number of real solutions of the given equation.

Next, use the graph to determine the number of points of intersection of f(x) and the horizontal lines represented by g(x)>−2, and write the number of real solutions of the given equation.

Similarly, find the number of real solutions of the given equation when g(x)<−2.

Finally, use the obtained number of real solutions to complete the given table.

From the graph, it can be observed that the graph of f(x) and g(x)=−2 touch each other at one point.

This means that when g(x) is equal to the minimum value of f(x), that is −2, f(x)=g(x) for one real value of x.

Thus, the number of real solutions of f(x)=g(x) is one when g(x) is equal to −2.

The graph of g(x)>a for each value of a represents a horizontal line above the line g(x)=a.

From the graph, it can be observed that each horizontal line passing through the graph of f(x) above the line g(x)=−2 intersects the parabola at two points.

This means that when g(x) has a value greater than −2, the graph of f(x) and g(x) intersect each other at two points.

Therefore, when g(x) has a value greater than the minimum value of f(x), that is −2, f(x)=g(x) for two real values of x.

Thus, the number of real solutions of f(x)=g(x) is two when g(x)>−2.

The graph of g(x)<a for each value of a represents a horizontal line below the line g(x)=a.

From the graph, it can be observed that each horizontal line below the line g(x)=−2

does not intersect the parabola at any point.

This means that when g(x) has a value less than −2, the graph of f(x) and g(x) do not intersect each other.

Therefore, when g(x) has a value less than the minimum value of f(x), that is −2, f(x) is not equal to g(x) for any real value of x.

Thus, the number of real solutions of f(x)=g(x) is zero when g(x)<−2.

Complete the table using the determined number of real solutions of f(x)=g(x) for each g(x).

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 3 Quadratic Equations 5 1

The completed table is:

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 3 Quadratic Equations 5 2

Quadratic Equations in HMH Algebra 2 (1st Edition, Module 3, Chapter 3, Exercise 3.3) Page 140 Problem 6 Answer

It is given that the maximum value of f(x) noticed from step C of Explore 1 is 2.

The given table shows the values of g(x), and the corresponding number of real solutions of f(x)=g(x).

The question requires to complete the given table.

Given the following graph, as drawn in step C of Explore 1:

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 3 Quadratic Equations 6

To complete the given table, use the graph to determine the number of points of intersection of f(x)

and g(x)=2, and write the number of real solutions of the given equation.

Next, use the graph to determine the number of points of intersection of f(x) and the horizontal lines represented by g(x)>2, and write the number of real solutions of the given equation.

Similarly, find the number of real solutions of the given equation when g(x)<2.

Finally, use the obtained number of real solutions to complete the given table.

From the graph, it can be observed that the graph of f(x) and g(x)=2 touch each other at one point.

This means that when g(x) is equal to the maximum value of f(x), that is 2, f(x)=g(x) for one real value of x.

Thus, the number of real solutions of f(x)=g(x) is one when g(x) is equal to 2.

The graph of g(x)<a for each value of a represents a horizontal line below the line g(x)=a.

From the graph, it can be observed that each horizontal line passing through the graph of f(x) below the line g(x)=2 intersects the parabola at two points.

This means that when g(x) has a value less than 2, the graph of f(x) and g(x) intersect each other at two points.

Therefore, when g(x) has a value less than the maximum value of f(x), that is 2, f(x)=g(x) for two real values of x.

Thus, the number of real solutions of f(x)=g(x) is two when g(x)<2.

The graph of g(x)>a for each value of a represents a horizontal line above the line g(x)=a.

From the graph, it can be observed that each horizontal line above the line g(x)=2 does not intersect the parabola at any point.

This means that when g(x) has a value greater than 2, the graph of f(x) and g(x) do not intersect each other.

Therefore, when g(x) has a value greater than the maximum value of f(x), that is 2, f(x) is not equal to g(x) for any real value of x.

Thus, the number of real solutions of f(x)=g(x) is zero when g(x)>2

Complete the table using the determined number of real solutions of f(x)=g(x) for each g(x).

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 3 Quadratic Equations 6 1

The completed table is:

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 3 Quadratic Equations 6 2

Quadratic Equations in HMH Algebra 2 (1st Edition, Module 3, Chapter 3, Exercise 3.3) Page 140 Problem 7 Answer

It is given that the maximum value of f(x) given in Reflect 2 is 2. Also, it is given that equation ax2+bx+c=0

where a>0 has real solutions when b2−4ac≥0. The steps used to generalize the results of Reflect 1 are given.

The question requires to generalize the results of Reflect 2, and write what is noticed.

Given the following table, as completed in Reflect 2:

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 3 Quadratic Equations 7

To answer the question, use the table to write the range of values of g(x) for which f(x)=g(x) has real solutions.

Then, determine the maximum value of f(x) by substituting −b/2a for x in the function, and simplifying it.

Next, use the obtained maximum value of f(x) to form an inequality in terms of g(x).

Finally, rewrite the inequality to form a general expression, generalize the result by writing the relation for which ax2+bx+c=0

has real solutions, and write what is observed using the given information.

The quadratic equation ax2+bx+c=0, where a<0, can be written as:ax2+bx=−c

The function f(x) used in Reflect 2 is of the form ax2+bx, where a<0.

The function g(x) is of the form −c.

From the table, it can be observed that the equation f(x)=g(x), where g(x) is equal to −c, has real solutions when g(x) is less than or equal to the maximum value of f(x), that is 2.

The maximum value of f(x) occurs at x=−b/2a.

Calculate the maximum value of f(x) by substituting x=−b/2a in the function, and simplifying the expression.

​f(−b/2a)=a(−b/2a)2+b(−b/2a)

f(−b/2a)=a(b2/4a2)−b2/2a

f(−b/2a)=b2/4a−b2/2a

f(−b/2a)=−b2/4a

Therefore, the equation f(x)=g(x) has real solutions when g(x)≤−b2/4a.

Substitute −c for g(x) in the inequality g(x)≤−b2/4a, add b2/4a on both sides, and multiply both sides by the negative number 4a.

​−c≤−b2/4a

b2/4a−c≤0

4a(b2/4a−c)≥4a(0)

b2−4ac≥0

​Therefore, the equation ax2+bx+c=0

where a<0 has real solutions when b2−4ac≥0.

It is given that equation ax2+bx+c=0 where a>0 has real solutions when b2−4ac≥0.

Thus, it can be concluded that the equation ax2+bx+c=0 has real solutions when b2−4ac≥0 for all real values of a.

The equation ax2+bx+c=0 where a<0 has real solutions when b2−4ac≥0.

It is observed that equation ax2+bx+c=0 has real solutions when b2−4ac≥0 for all real values of a.

Quadratic Equations in HMH Algebra 2 (1st Edition, Module 3, Chapter 3, Exercise 3.3) Page 141 Problem 8 Answer

The given equation is x2−2x+7=0.

The question requires to solve the given equation by completing the square, and then state whether the obtained solutions are real or non-real.

To solve the equation by completing the square, rewrite the equation in the form x2+bx=c.

Then, identify the value of b, and calculate (b/2)2.

Then, add (b/2)2 on both sides of the rewritten equation, factor the left-side expression using algebraic identities, and use the definition of square root.

Finally, solve the obtained equation to determine the required solutions, and observe them to state whether they are real or non-real.

Subtract 7 from both sides of x2−2x+7=0.

​x2−2x+7−7=0−7

x2−2x=−7……………(1)

​Comparing the equation (1) to the equation x2+bx=c, it can be determined that the value of b is −2.

Therefore, the value of (b/2)2 is (−2/2)2=4/4, that is 1.

Add the value of (b/2)2, that is 1, on both sides of equation (1).

Then, factorise the left-hand side expression using the algebraic identity a2−2ab+b2=(a−b)2, and simplify the right-hand side expression.

​x2−2x+1=−7+1

(x−1)2=−7+1

(x−1)2=−6

​Use the definition of square root to simplify (x−1)2=−6, and then add 1 on both sides.

​(x−1)2=−6

x−1=±√−6

x=1±√−6

Therefore, the required solutions are x=1+√−6 and x=1−√−6.

It can be observed that the solutions x=1±√−6 contain the square root of a negative number.

Therefore, the solutions are non-real.

Thus, there are two non-real solutions: x=1+√−6 and x=1−√−6.

The required solutions are x=1+√−6 and x=1−√−6.The solutions are non-real.

Quadratic Equations in HMH Algebra 2 (1st Edition, Module 3, Chapter 3, Exercise 3.3) Page 142 Problem 9 Answer

From part A of the example, it can be observed that the equation 3x2+9x−6=0 has two real solutions: −3+√17/2 and −3−√17/2.

Every real number a can be written as the complex number a+0i, having the imaginary part equal to 0.

This means that every real number is a complex number.

The real solutions −3+√17/2 and −3−√17/2 can be written as the complex solutions −3+√17/2+0i and −3−√17/2+0i respectively.

This means that both the real solutions of the equation in part A are complex.

Therefore, the equation in part A has two complex solutions, having the imaginary part equal to 0.

From part B of the example, it can be observed that the equation x2−2x+7=0 has two non-real solutions: 1+√−6 and 1−i√6.

The non-real solutions 1+√−6 and 1−√−6 can be written as the complex solutions 1+i√6and 1−i√6 respectively, having non-zero real and imaginary parts.

This means that both the non-real solutions of the equation in part B are complex.

Therefore, the equation in part B has two complex solutions, having non-zero real and imaginary parts.

The equations in part A and part B both have two complex solutions because every real and non-real number is a complex number.

This means that the solutions of the equation in part A are real and complex, and the solutions of the equation in part B are non-real and complex.

HMH Algebra 2 Chapter 3 Exercise 3.3 Quadratic Equations key

Quadratic Equations in HMH Algebra 2 (1st Edition, Module 3, Chapter 3, Exercise 3.3) Page 142 Problem 10 Answer

The given equation is x2+8x+17=0.

The question requires to solve the given equation by completing the square, and then state whether the obtained solutions are real or non-real.

To solve the equation by completing the square, rewrite the equation in the form x2+bx=c. Then, identify the value of b, and calculate (b/2)2.

Then, add (b/2)2 on both sides of the rewritten equation, factor the left-side expression using algebraic identities, and use the definition of square root.

Finally, solve the obtained equation to determine the required solutions, and observe them to state whether they are real or non-real.

Subtract 17 from both sides of x2+8x+17=0.​

x2+8x+17−17=0−17

x2+8x=−17……………(1)​

Comparing the equation (1) to the equation x2+bx=c, it can be determined that the value of b is 8.

Therefore, the value of (b/2)2 is (8/2)2

=(4)2, that is 16.

Add the value of (b/2)2, that is 16, on both sides of equation (1).

Then, factorise the left-hand side expression using the algebraic identity a2+2ab+b2=(a+b)2, and simplify the right-hand side expression.

​x2+8x+16=−17+16

(x+4)2=−17+16

(x+4)2=−1

​Use the definition of square root to simplify (x+4)2=−1.

Then, subtract 4 from both sides, and rewrite the expression using the imaginary unit i.

​(x+4)2=−1

x+4=±√−1

x=−4±√−1

x=−4±i

Therefore, the required solutions are x=−4+i and x=−4−i.

It can be observed that the solutions x=−4±i contain the imaginary unit i, which is equal to the square root of the negative number −1.

Therefore, the solutions are non-real. Thus, there are two non-real solutions: x=−4+i and x=−4−i.

The required solutions are x=−4+i and x=−4−i. The solutions are non-real.

Quadratic Equations in HMH Algebra 2 (1st Edition, Module 3, Chapter 3, Exercise 3.3) Page 142 Problem 11 Answer

The given equation is x2+10x−7=0.

The question requires to solve the given equation by completing the square, and then state whether the obtained solutions are real or non-real.

To solve the equation by completing the square, rewrite the equation in the form x2+bx=c.

Then, identify the value of b, and calculate (b/2)2.

Then, add (b/2)2 on both sides of the rewritten equation, factor the left-side expression using algebraic identities, and use the definition of square root.

Finally, solve the obtained equation to determine the required solutions, and observe them to state whether they are real or non-real.

Add 7 on both sides of x2+10x−7=0.​

x2+10x−7+7=0+7

x2+10x=7……………(1)

Comparing the equation (1) to the equation x2+bx=c, it can be determined that the value of b is 10.

Therefore, the value of (b/2)2 is (10/2)2=(5)2, that is 25.

Add the value of (b/2)2, that is 25, on both sides of equation (1).

Then, factorise the left-hand side expression using the algebraic identity a2+2ab+b2=(a+b)2, and simplify the right-hand side expression.​

x2+10x+25=7+25

(x+5)2=7+25

(x+5)2=32

​Use the definition of square root to simplify (x+5)2=32, and then subtract 5 from both sides.

​(x+5)2=32

x+5=±√32

x=−5±√32

Rewrite the expression √32, use the product property of square roots, and simplify the square root.

x=−5±√16⋅2

x=−5±√16⋅√2

x=−5±4√2​

Therefore, the required solutions are x=−5+4√2 and x=−5−4√2.

It can be observed that the solutions x=−5±4√2 do not contain the square root of a negative number or the imaginary unit i.Therefore, the solutions are real.

The required solutions are x=−5+4√2 and x=−5−4√2.

The solutions are real.

Quadratic Equations in HMH Algebra 2 (1st Edition, Module 3, Chapter 3, Exercise 3.3) Page 142 Problem 12 Answer

It is given that the function A(w)=w(50−w) gives the area of the given garden in square feet, where w

is the width of the garden in feet.

The question requires to determine whether the garden can have an area equal to 700 square feet.

It is required to answer this by writing an equation for the given situation, and then determining whether the solutions are real or non-real.

To answer the question, let the area A(w) be equal to 700 square feet.

Then, use the given function to form a quadratic equation in terms of w. Next, compare the equation to aw2+bw+c=0 and identify the values of a,b,c.

Finally, determine the discriminant of the equation to determine whether the solutions are real or non-real, and thus, determine whether the area can be equal to 700 square feet or not.

Let the area of the garden be equal to 700 square feet. Therefore, A(w)=700.

Substitute w(50−w) for A(w) in A(w)=700. Then, multiply the terms, and subtract 700 from both sides.

w(50−w)=700

50w−w2=700−w2+50w−700=0……………(1)

Comparing the equation (1) to the equation aw2+bw+c=0, it can be determined that the values of a,b,c are −1,50,−700 respectively.

Substitute −1 for a, 50 for b, and −700 for c in the formula for discriminant b2−4ac. Then, multiply the terms, and subtract the terms.

​b2−4ac=(50)2−4(−1)(−700)

=2500−2800

=−300

The discriminant is equal to −300, which is less than 0.

This means that the equation A(w)=700 has two non-real solutions.

Therefore, there is no real value of w for which the area of the garden is equal to 700 square feet.

Thus, the garden cannot have an area equal to 700 square feet.

No, the garden cannot have an area equal to 700 square feet.

Quadratic Equations in HMH Algebra 2 (1st Edition, Module 3, Chapter 3, Exercise 3.3) Page 143 Problem 13 Answer

It is given that the height h of a triangular sail is twice the length of its base b, where the height and base are given in inches.

The question requires to determine whether the area of a triangular sail can be equal to 10 square inches.

It is required to answer this by writing an equation for the given situation, and then determining whether the solutions are real or non-real.

To answer the question, use the given information and the formula for area of a triangle to write an equation for the given situation.

Next, let the area A(b) of the sail be equal to 10 square inches. Then, use the obtained function for area to form a quadratic equation in terms of b.

Next, compare the equation to pb2+qb+r=0 and identify the values of p,q, and r.

Finally, determine the discriminant of the equation to determine whether the solutions are real or non-real, and thus, determine whether the area can be equal to 10 square inches or not.

From the given information, it can be determined that h=2b.

Substitute 2b for h in the formula A=1/2bh for area of a triangle, and multiply the terms.

A=1/2b(2b)

A=b2

A(b)=b2

Let the area of the triangular sail be equal to 10

square inches. Therefore, A(b)=10.

Substitute b2 for A(b) in A(b)=10, and subtract 10 from both sides.

​b2=10

b2−10=0……………(1)

Comparing the equation (1) to the equation pb2+qb+r=0, it can be determined that the values of p,q,r are 1,0,−10 respectively.

If a quadratic equation is in the form pb2+qb+r=0, then its determinant is equal to q2−4pr.

Substitute 1 for p, 0 for q, and −10 for r in the formula for discriminant q2−4pr. Then, multiply the terms, and add the terms.

​q2−4pr=(0)2

−4(1)(−10)

=0+40

=40

The discriminant is equal to 40, which is greater than 0.

This means that the equation A(b)=10 has two real solutions.

Therefore, there is some real value of b for which the area of the triangular sail is equal to 10

square inches.

Thus, the triangular sail can have an area equal to 10 square inches.

Yes, the area of the triangular sail can be equal to 10 square inches.

Quadratic Equations in HMH Algebra 2 (1st Edition, Module 3, Chapter 3, Exercise 3.3) Page 143 Problem 14 Answer

The given equation is 7x2+2x+3=−1.

The question requires to solve the given equation using the quadratic formula, and then check one of the solutions using substitution.

To solve the equation, rewrite the equation in the form ax2+bx+c=0. Then, identify the values of a,b,c

, and substitute the values in the quadratic formula. Next, simplify the expression on the right side to obtain the required solutions.

Finally, substitute one of the solutions in the given equation, and simplify using the distributive property of multiplication and the value of i2 to prove that both sides of the equation are equal.

Add 1 on both sides of 7x2+2x+3=−1.

​7x2+2x+3+1=−1+1

7x2+2x+4=0……………(1)

Comparing the equation (1) to the equation ax2+bx+c=0, it can be determined that the values of a,b,c are 7,2,4 respectively.

Substitute 7 for a, 2 for b, and 4 for c in the quadratic formula x=−b±√b2−4ac/2a. Then, multiply the terms and combine the terms in the square root.

​x=−2±√(2)2−4(7)(4)/2(7)

x=−2±√4−112/14

x=−2±√−108/14

Rewrite the square root using the imaginary unit i. Then, simplify the square root, and simplify the expression.

​x=−2±i√108/14

x=−2±i√36⋅3/14

x=−2±6i√3/14

x=−1±3i√3/7

Thus, the required solutions are:

x=−1/7−3i√3/7

x=−1/7+3i√3/7Consider the solution x=−1/7−3i√3/7.

Substitute −1/7−3i√3/7 for x in the given equation 7x2+2x+3=−1.

Then, square the term −1−3i√3/7 in the equation, substitute −1 for i2, and simplify the expression in the parentheses.

​7(−1/7−3i√3/7)2

+2(−1/7−3i√3/7)+3=?

−1/7(1/49+6i√3/49+27i2/49)+2(−1/7−3i√3/7)+3=?

−1/7(1/49+6i√3/49+27(−1)/49)+2(−1/7−3i√3/7)+3=?

−1/7(1/49+6i√3/49−27/49)+2(−1/7−3i√3/7)+3=?

−1​Apply the distributive property of multiplication, combine the terms, and simplify the expression on the left side.

1/7+6i√3/7−27/7−2/7−6i√3/7+3=?

−1/−28/7+3=?

−1/−4+3=?

−1/−1=−1

Thus, the solution x=−1/7−3i√3/7 is checked.

The required solutions are:x=−1/7−3i√3/7

x=−1/7+3i√3/7

The solution x=−1/7−3i√3/7 is checked.

Quadratic Equations in HMH Algebra 2 (1st Edition, Module 3, Chapter 3, Exercise 3.3) Page 145 Problem 15 Answer

The given equation is x2+8x+12=2x.

The question requires to solve the given equation using the quadratic formula, and then check one of the solutions using substitution.

To solve the equation, rewrite the equation in the form ax2+bx+c=0. Then, identify the values of a,b,c, and substitute the values in the quadratic formula.

Next, simplify the expression on the right side to obtain the required solutions.

Finally, substitute one of the solutions in the given equation, and simplify using the distributive property of multiplication and the value of i2 to prove that both sides of the equation are equal.

Subtract 2x from both sides of x2+8x+12=2x.

​x2+8x+12−2x=2x−2x

x2+6x+12=0……………(1)

Comparing the equation (1) to the equation ax2+bx+c=0, it can be determined that the values of a,b,c are 1,6,12 respectively.

Substitute 1 for a, 6 for b, and 12 for c in the quadratic formula x=−b±√b2−4ac/2a. Then, multiply the terms and combine the terms in the square root.

​x=−6±√(6)2−4(1)(12)/2(1)

x=−6±√36−48/2

x=−6±√−12/2

​Rewrite the square root using the imaginary unit i. Then, simplify the square root, and simplify the expression.

​x=−6±i√12/2

x=−6±i√4⋅3/2

x=−6±2i√3/2

x=−3±i√3

Thus, the required solutions are:

​x=−3−i√3

x=−3+i√3

Consider the solution x=−3−i√3.

Substitute −3−i√3 for x in the given equation x2+8x+12=2x. Then, square the term −3−i√3 in the equation, substitute −1 for i2, and simplify the expression in the parentheses.

​(−3−i√3)2+8(−3−i√3)+12=?

2(−3−i√3)(9+6i√3+3i2)+8(−3−i√3)+12=?

2(−3−i√3)(9+6i√3+3(−1))+8(−3−i√3)+12=?

2(−3−i√3)(9+6i√3−3)+8(−3−i√3)+12=?

2(−3−i√3)​

Apply the distributive property of multiplication, combine the terms, and simplify the expression on the left side.

​9+6i√3−3−24−8i√3+12=?

−6−2i√3

18−24−2i√3=?

−6−2i√3−6−2i√3

=−6−2i√3

Thus, the solution x=−3−i√3 is checked.

The required solutions are:

x=−3−i√3

x=−3+i√3​

The solution x=−3−i√3 is checked.

Quadratic Equations in HMH Algebra 2 (1st Edition, Module 3, Chapter 3, Exercise 3.3) Page 145 Problem 16 Answer

The given equation is ax2+bx+c=0. The given solution is p+qi.

The question requires to what should be the other solution of the equation, and explain how it is determined.

Let the other solution of the given equation be the complex number f+gi.

To answer the question, use the property for sum of roots of a quadratic equation, and the assumed solution and the given solution to write an equation for the sum of the solutions.

Then, observe both sides to determine the value of the imaginary part of the sum, and solve the resulting equation to determine one of the constants in the assumed solution.

Next, use the property for product of roots of a quadratic equation, and the assumed solution and the given solution to write an equation for the product of the solutions.

Then, observe both sides to determine the value of the imaginary part of the product, and solve the resulting equation to determine the other constant in the assumed solution.

Finally, use the constants to determine the other solution, and explain why is it the solution.

The sum of the two solutions of the quadratic equation ax2+bx+c=0 is the quotient −b/a.

Therefore, the sum of f+gi and p+qi is −b/a.

Form an equation for the sum of the solutions, and group the real and imaginary parts.​

(f+gi)+(p+qi)=−b/a

(f+p)+(gi+qi)=−b/a

(f+p)+(g+q)i=−b/a

The right-hand side expression −b/a is a real number.

Therefore, (f+p)+(g+q)i must also be a real number. This means that the imaginary part (g+q) is equal to 0.

Equate g+q and 0, and subtract q from both sides.​

g+q=0

g=−q​

The product of the two solutions of the quadratic equation ax2+bx+c=0 is the quotient c/a.

Therefore, the product of f+gi and p+qi is c/a.

Form an equation for the product of the solutions.

Then, multiply the terms, substitute −1 for i2, and group the real and imaginary parts.

(f+gi)(p+qi)=c/a

fp+fqi+gpi+gqi2=c/a

fp+fqi+gpi+gq(−1)=c/a

fp+fqi+gpi−gq=c/a

(fp−gq)+(fq+gp)i=c/a

The right-hand side expression c/a is a real number.

Therefore, (fp−gq)+(fq+gp)i must also be a real number.

This means that the imaginary part fq+gp is equal to 0.

Equate fq+gp and 0, substitute −q for g, divide both sides by q, and add p on both sides.

​fq+gp=0

fq+(−q)p=0

fq−pq=0

q(f−p)=0

f−p=0

f=p

​Substitute −q for g and p for f in the solution f+gi.

​f+gi=p+(−q)i

f+gi=p−qi

​Therefore, the other solution of the given equation is p−qi.

Thus, it can be observed that the other solution must be p−qi

such that the sum and product of the solutions are equal to −b/a and c/a respectively.

The other solution of the equation must be p−qi because the sum and product of the solutions of the given equation are equal to −b/a and c/a respectively only if the two solutions are complex conjugates of each other.

Step-by-step solutions for HMH Algebra 2 Module 3 Exercise 3.3  

Quadratic Equations in HMH Algebra 2 (1st Edition, Module 3, Chapter 3, Exercise 3.3) Page 145 Problem 17 Answer

To complete the square, first the equation is rewritten in the form x2+bx=c. Next, the value of b is identified, and (b/2)2 is calculated.

The value of (b/2)2 is added on both sides of the rewritten equation, and the left-side of the equation is factorized.

Finally, the definition of square root is used, and the equation is solved for the required values of x.

To use the quadratic formula, the equation is rewritten in the form ax2+bx+c=0 and the values of a,b,c are written. Then, the values of a,b,c

are substituted in the quadratic formula and the expression is simplified to determine the required values of x.

It can be observed that using the quadratic formula to solve a quadratic equation is much simpler and faster as compared to solving a quadratic equation by completing the square.

Thus, using the quadratic formula to solve a quadratic equation is much easier than completing the square.

Using the quadratic formula to solve a quadratic equation is much easier than completing the square because quadratic formula only requires to rewrite the equation in the form ax2+bx+c=0, identify the values of a,b,c, and substitute them into the quadratic formula to obtain the values of x.

The completing the square method takes much longer to solve and is more complex because it involves rewriting the equation in the form x2+bx=c, calculating (b/2)2, adding (b/2)2 on both sides, factoring the left-side, using the definition of square root, and finally, solving the resulting equation.

Quadratic Equations in HMH Algebra 2 (1st Edition, Module 3, Chapter 3, Exercise 3.3)Page 146 Problem 18 Answer

The given graph shows the graph of the function f(x) equal to x2+6x. The given equations are:

​x2+6x+6=0

x2+6x+9=0

x2+6x+12=0

​The question requires to use the given graph to determine the number of real solutions of the given equations.

To determine the number of real solutions, rewrite the equations using subtraction in the form ax2+bx=−c, and equate the left and right sides of the rewritten equations to f(x) and g(x).

Then, draw the graph of each g(x) on the given graph using horizontal lines. Next, use the points of intersection of f(x)

and g(x) to determine the number of points where they intersect.

Finally, use the points to determine the number of real solutions for each g(x), and thus the number of real solutions for each equation.

The first given quadratic equation is x2+6x+6=0.

Subtract 6 from both sides of the equation to rewrite it in the form ax2+bx=−c.

x2+6x=−6

The left-hand side of the equation is of the form ax2+bx. Equating the left-hand side of the rewritten equation to f(x) gives the function f(x)=x2+6x.

The right-hand side of the equation is of the form −c. Equating the right-hand side of the rewritten equation to g(x), the obtained function is g(x)=−6.

The second given quadratic equation is x2+6x+9=0.

Subtract 9 from both sides of the equation to rewrite it in the form ax2+bx=−c.

x2+6x=−9

The left-hand side of the equation is of the form ax2+bx. Equating the left-hand side of the rewritten equation to f(x) gives the function f(x)=x2+6x.

The right-hand side of the equation is of the form −c. Equating the right-hand side of the rewritten equation to g(x), the obtained function is g(x)=−9.

The third given quadratic equation is x2+6x+12=0.

Subtract 12 from both sides of the equation to rewrite it in the form ax2+bx=−c.

x2+6x=−12

The left-hand side of the equation is of the form ax2+bx. Equating the left-hand side of the rewritten equation to f(x) gives the function f(x)=x2+6x.

The right-hand side of the equation is of the form −c. Equating the right-hand side of the rewritten equation to g(x), the obtained function is g(x)=−12.

Construct a table having columns for the given equations, the rewritten equations, and the obtained expressions for f(x) and g(x).

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 3 Quadratic Equations 18

From the completed table from previous part of the exercise, it can be determined that functions to be graphed are:

​g(x)=−6

g(x)=−9

g(x)=−12

​Graph the functions on the given graph by drawing horizontal lines having the y-intercept equal to the right-hand side of the equations.

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 3 Quadratic Equations 18 1

From the graph, it can be observed that the graph of f(x) and g(x)=−6

intersect each other at two points.

This means that x2+6x=−6 for two real values of x.

Adding 6 on both sides, the equation becomes x2+6x+6=0.

Therefore, the equation x2+6x+6=0 has two real solutions. This is because the value of g(x)

is greater than the minimum value of f(x), that is −9.

From the graph, it can be observed that the graph of f(x) and g(x)=−9 touch each other at one point.

This means that x2+6x=−9 for one real value of x.

Adding 9 on both sides, the equation becomes x2+6x+9=0.

Therefore, the equation x2+6x+9=0 has one real solution. This is because the value of g(x)

is equal to the minimum value of f(x), that is −9.

From the graph, it can be observed that the graph of f(x) and g(x)=−12 do not touch or intersect each other at any point.

This means that x2+6x=−12 for no real value of x.

Adding 12 on both sides, the equation becomes x2+6x+12=0.

Therefore, the equation x2+6x+12=0 has no real solution.

This is because the value of g(x) is less than the minimum value of f(x), that is −9.

The equation x2+6x+6=0 has two real solutions.

This is because the equation can be written as x2+6x equal to −6, where the left-hand side represents the given function f(x), and the right-hand side represents the function g(x).

The equation has two real solutions because the graphs of f(x) and g(x) intersect at two points.

The equation x2+6x+9=0 has one real solution.

This is because the equation can be written as x2+6x equal to −9, where the left-hand side represents the given function f(x), and the right-hand side represents the function g(x).

The equation has one real solution because the graphs of f(x) and g(x) intersect at one point.

The equation x2+6x+12=0 has no real solution.

This is because the equation can be written as x2+6x equal to −12, where the left-hand side represents the given function f(x), and the right-hand side represents the function g(x).

The equation has no real solution because the graphs of f(x) and g(x) intersect at no points.

Quadratic Equations in HMH Algebra 2 (1st Edition, Module 3, Chapter 3, Exercise 3.3) Page 146 Problem 19 Answer

The given graph shows the graph of the function f(x) equal to −1/2x2+3x. The given equations are:​

−1/2x2+3x−3=0

−1/2x2+3x−9/2=0

−1/2x2+3x−6=0

​The question requires to use the given graph to determine the number of real solutions of the given equations.

To determine the number of real solutions, rewrite the equations using subtraction in the form ax2+bx=−c, and equate the left and right sides of the rewritten equations to f(x) and g(x).

Then, draw the graph of each g(x) on the given graph using horizontal lines.

Next, use the points of intersection of f(x) and g(x) to determine the number of points where they intersect.

Finally, use the points to determine the number of real solutions for each g(x), and thus the number of real solutions for each equation.

The first given quadratic equation is −1/2x2+3x−3=0.

Add 3 on both sides of the equation to rewrite it in the form ax2+bx=−c.

−1/2x2+3x=3

The left-hand side of the equation is of the form ax2+bx. Equating the left-hand side of the rewritten equation to f(x) gives the function f(x)=−1/2x2+3x.

The right-hand side of the equation is of the form −c. Equating the right-hand side of the rewritten equation to g(x), the obtained function is g(x)=3.

The second given quadratic equation is −1/2x2+3x−9/2=0.

Add 9/2 on both sides of the equation to rewrite it in the form ax2+bx=−c.

−1/2x2+3x=9/2

The left-hand side of the equation is of the form ax2+bx. Equating the left-hand side of the rewritten equation to f(x) gives the function f(x)=−1/2x2+3x.

The right-hand side of the equation is of the form −c. Equating the right-hand side of the rewritten equation to g(x), the obtained function is g(x)=9/2.

The third given quadratic equation is −1/2x2+3x−6=0.

Add 6 on both sides of the equation to rewrite it in the form ax2+bx=−c.

−1/2x2+3x=6

The left-hand side of the equation is of the form ax2+bx. Equating the left-hand side of the rewritten equation to f(x) gives the function f(x)=−1/2x2+3x.

The right-hand side of the equation is of the form −c. Equating the right-hand side of the rewritten equation to g(x), the obtained function is g(x)=6.

Construct a table having columns for the given equations, the rewritten equations, and the obtained expressions for f(x) and g(x).

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 3 Quadratic Equations 19

From the completed table from previous part of the exercise, it can be determined that functions to be graphed are:​

g(x)=3

g(x)=9/2

g(x)=6

Graph the functions on the given graph by drawing horizontal lines having the y-intercept equal to the right-hand side of the equations.

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 3 Quadratic Equations 19 1

From the graph, it can be observed that the graph of f(x) and g(x)=3 intersect each other at two points.

This means that −1/2x2+3x=3 for two real values of x.

Subtracting 3 from both sides, the equation becomes −1/2x2+3x−3=0.

Therefore, the equation −1/2x2+3x−3=0 has two real solutions.

From the graph, it can be observed that the graph of f(x) and g(x)=9/2 touch each other at one point.

This means that −1/2x2+3x=9/2 for one real value of x.

Subtracting 9/2 from both sides, the equation becomes −1/2x2+3x−9/2=0.

Therefore, the equation −1/2x2+3x−9/2=0 has one real solution.

From the graph, it can be observed that the graph of f(x) and g(x)=6 do not touch or intersect each other at any point.

This means that −1/2x2+3x=6 for no real value of x.

Subtracting 6 from both sides, the equation becomes −1/2x2+3x−6=0.

Therefore, the equation −1/2x2+3x−6=0 has no real solution.

The equation −1/2x2+3x−3=0 has two real solutions.

This is because the equation can be written as −1/2x2+3x equal to 3, where the left-hand side represents the given function f(x), and the right-hand side represents the function g(x).

The equation has two real solutions because the graphs of f(x) and g(x) intersect at two points.

The equation −1/2x2+3x−9/2=0 has one real solution.

This is because the equation can be written as −1/2x2+3x equal to 9/2, where the left-hand side represents the given function f(x), and the right-hand side represents the function g(x).

The equation has one real solution because the graphs of f(x) and g(x) intersect at one point.

The equation −1/2x2+3x−6=0 has no real solution.

This is because the equation can be written as −1/2x2+3x equal to 6, where the left-hand side represents the given function f(x), and the right-hand side represents the function g(x).

The equation has no real solution because the graphs of f(x) and g(x) intersect at no points.

Quadratic Equations in HMH Algebra 2 (1st Edition, Module 3, Chapter 3, Exercise 3.3) Page 146 Problem 20 Answer

The given equation is x2+2x+8=0.

The question requires to solve the given equation by completing the square, and then state whether the obtained solutions are real or non-real.

To solve the equation by completing the square, rewrite the equation in the form x2+bx=c. Then, identify the value of b, and calculate (b/2)2.

Then, add (b/2)2 on both sides of the rewritten equation, factor the left-side expression using algebraic identities, and use the definition of square root.

Finally, solve the obtained equation to determine the required solutions, and observe them to state whether they are real or non-real.

Subtract 8 from both sides of x2+2x+8=0.

​x2+2x+8−8=0−8

x2+2x=−8……………(1)

Comparing the equation (1) to the equation x2+bx=c, it can be determined that the value of b is 2.

Therefore, the value of (b/2)2 is (2/2)2

=(1)2, that is 1.

Add the value of (b/2)2, that is 1, on both sides of equation (1).

Then, factorise the left-hand side expression using the algebraic identity a2+2ab+b2=(a+b)2, and simplify the right-hand side expression.

​x2+2x+1=−8+1

(x+1)2=−8+1

(x+1)2=−7

​Use the definition of square root to simplify (x+1)2=−7. Then, subtract 1 from both sides, and rewrite the expression using the imaginary unit i.

​(x+1)2=−7

x+1=±√−7

x=−1±√−7

x=−1±i√7

Therefore, the required solutions are x=−1+i√7 and x=−1−i√7.

It can be observed that the solutions x=−1±i√7 contain the imaginary unit i, which is equal to the square root of the negative number −1.

Therefore, the solutions are non-real.

The required solutions are x=−1+i√7 and x=−1−i√7.

The solutions are non-real.

Quadratic Equations in HMH Algebra 2 (1st Edition, Module 3, Chapter 3, Exercise 3.3) Page 147 Problem 21 Answer

The given equation is x2−5x=−20.

The question requires to solve the given equation by completing the square, and then state whether the obtained solutions are real or non-real.

To solve the equation by completing the square, compare the equation to x2+bx=c.

Then, identify the value of b, and calculate (b/2)2. Then, add (b/2)2 on both sides of the rewritten equation, factor the left-side expression using algebraic identities, and use the definition of square root.

Finally, solve the obtained equation to determine the required solutions, and observe them to state whether they are real or non-real.

Let the equation x2−5x=−20 be equation (1).

Comparing the equation (1) to the equation x2+bx=c, it can be determined that the value of b is −5.

Therefore, the value of (b/2)2 is (−5/2)2=25/4.

Add the value of (b/2)2, that is 25/4, on both sides of equation (1).

Then, factorise the left-hand side expression using the algebraic identity a2−2ab+b2=(a−b)2, and simplify the right-hand side expression.

​x2−5x+25/4

=−20+25/4

(x−5/2)2=−20+25/4

(x−5/2)2=−55/4

Use the definition of square root to simplify (x−5/2)2=−55/4. Then, add 5/2 on both sides, and rewrite the expression using the imaginary unit i.

​(x−5/2)2=−55/4

x−5/2=±√−55/4

x=5/2±√−55/4

x=5/2±i√55/4

Apply the quotient property of square roots, and then simplify the square root in the denominator.

​x=5/2±i√55/√4

x=5/2±i√55/2

x=5±i√55/2

Therefore, the required solutions are x=5+i√55/2 and x=5−i√55/2.

 

It can be observed that the solutions x=5±i√55/2 contain the imaginary unit i, which is equal to the square root of the negative number −1.

Therefore, the solutions are non-real.

The required solutions are x=5+i√55/2 and x=5−i√55/2.

The solutions are non-real.

Quadratic Equations in HMH Algebra 2 (1st Edition, Module 3, Chapter 3, Exercise 3.3) Page 147 Problem 22 Answer

The given equation is 5x2−6x=8.

The question requires to solve the given equation by completing the square, and then state whether the obtained solutions are real or non-real.

To solve the equation by completing the square, rewrite the equation in the form x2+bx=c. Then, identify the value of b, and calculate (b/2)2.

Then, add (b/2)2 on both sides of the rewritten equation, factor the left-side expression using algebraic identities, and use the definition of square root.

Finally, solve the obtained equation to determine the required solutions, and observe them to state whether they are real or non-real.

Divide both sides of 5x2−6x=8 by 5.​

5x2−6x/5=8/5

x2−6/5

x=8/5……………(1)​

Comparing the equation (1) to the equation x2+bx=c, it can be determined that the value of b is −6/5.

Therefore, the value of (b/2)2 is (−6/5)(2/2)=(−3/5)2, that is 9/25.

Add the value of (b/2)2, that is 9/25, on both sides of equation (1).

Then, factorise the left-hand side expression using the algebraic identity a2−2ab+b2=(a−b)2, and simplify the right-hand side expression.

​x2−6/5

x+9/25=8/5+925

(x−3/5)2=8/5+9/25

(x−3/5)2=49/25

Use the definition of square root to simplify (x−3/5)2=49/25, and then add 3/5 on both sides.​

(x−3/5)2=49/25

x−3/5=±√49/25

x=3/5±√49/25

Apply the quotient property of square roots, and then simplify the square roots.​

x=3/5±√49/√25

x=3/5±7/5

When x is equal to 3/5−7/5, the simplified value of x is 3−7/5, that is −4/5.

When x is equal to 3/5+7/5, the simplified value of x is 3+7/5=10/5, that is 2.

Therefore, the required solutions are x=−4/5 and x=2.

It can be observed that the solutions do not contain the square root of a negative number, or the imaginary unit i.

Therefore, the solutions are real.

The required solutions are x=−4/5 and x=2.

The solutions are real.

HMH Algebra 2 Chapter 3 Quadratic Equations detailed solutions

Quadratic Equations in HMH Algebra 2 (1st Edition, Module 3, Chapter 3, Exercise 3.3) Page 147 Problem 23 Answer

The given equation is 7x2+13x=5.

The question requires to solve the given equation by completing the square, and then state whether the obtained solutions are real or non-real.

To solve the equation by completing the square, rewrite the equation in the form x2+bx=c.

Then, identify the value of b, and calculate (b/2)2. Then, add (b/2)2 on both sides of the rewritten equation, factor the left-side expression using algebraic identities, and use the definition of square root.

Finally, solve the obtained equation to determine the required solutions, and observe them to state whether they are real or non-real.

Divide both sides of 7x2+13x=5 by 7.

​7x2+13x/7=5/7

x2+13/7

x=5/7……………(1)

Comparing the equation (1) to the equation x2+bx=c, it can be determined that the value of b is 13/7.

Therefore, the value of (b/2)2 is (13/7)22=(13/14)2, that is 169/196.

Add the value of (b/2)2, that is 169/196, on both sides of equation (1).

Then, factorise the left-hand side expression using the algebraic identity a2+2ab+b2=(a+b)2, and simplify the right-hand side expression.

​x2+13/7

x+169/196

=5/7+169/196

(x+13/14)2=5/7+169/196

(x+13/14)2=309/196​

Use the definition of square root to simplify (x+13/14)2=309/196, and then subtract 13/14 from both sides.

​(x+13/14)2=309/196

x+13/14=±√309/196

x=−13/14±√309/196

Apply the quotient property of square roots, and then simplify the square roots.

​x=−13/14±√309/√196

x=−13/14±√309/14

x=−13±√309/14

Therefore, the required solutions are x=−13+√309/14 and x=−13−√309/14.

It can be observed that the solutions x=−13±√309/14 do not contain the square root of a negative number, or the imaginary unit i.

Therefore, the solutions are real.

The required solutions are x=−13+√309/14 and x=−13−√309/14.

The solutions are real.

Quadratic Equations in HMH Algebra 2 (1st Edition, Module 3, Chapter 3, Exercise 3.3) Page 147 Problem 24 Answer

The given equation is −x2−6x−11=0.

The question requires to solve the given equation by completing the square, and then state whether the obtained solutions are real or non-real.

To solve the equation by completing the square, rewrite the equation in the form x2+bx=c. Then, identify the value of b, and calculate (b/2)2.

Then, add (b/2)2 on both sides of the rewritten equation, factor the left-side expression using algebraic identities, and use the definition of square root.

Finally, solve the obtained equation to determine the required solutions, and observe them to state whether they are real or non-real.

Multiply both sides of −x2−6x−11=0 by −1, and then subtract 11 from both sides.

​−1(−x2−6x−11)=−1(0)

x2+6x+11=0

x2+6x=−11……………(1)

Comparing the equation (1) to the equation x2+bx=c, it can be determined that the value of b is 6.

Therefore, the value of (b/2)2 is (6/2)2

=(3)2, that is 9.

Add the value of (b/2)2, that is 9, on both sides of equation (1).

Then, factorise the left-hand side expression using the algebraic identity a2+2ab+b2=(a+b)2, and simplify the right-hand side expression.

​x2+6x+9=−11+9

(x+3)2=−11+9

(x+3)2=−2

Use the definition of square root to simplify (x+3)2=−2.

Then, subtract 3 from both sides, and rewrite the expression using the imaginary unit i.

​(x+3)2=−2

x+3=±√−2

x=−3±√−2

x=−3±i√2

Therefore, the required solutions are x=−3+i√2 and x=−3−i√2.

It can be observed that the solutions x=−3±i√2. contain the imaginary unit i, which is equal to the square root of the negative number −1.

Therefore, the solutions are non-real.The required solutions are x=−3+i√2 and x=−3−i√2.

The solutions are non-real.

Quadratic Equations in HMH Algebra 2 (1st Edition, Module 3, Chapter 3, Exercise 3.3) Page 147 Problem 25 Answer

The given equation is 7x2−11x+10=0.

The question requires to state the number of solutions without solving the equation, and determine whether the solutions are real or non-real.

To answer the question, compare the equation to ax2+bx+c=0 and identify the values of a,b,c.

Then, calculate the discriminant of the equation, and observe its value to determine the number and type of solutions of the given equation.

It can be observed that the given equation is a quadratic equation of the form ax2+bx+c=0.

Comparing the given equation to the equation ax2+bx+c=0, it can be determined that the values of a,b,c are 7,−11,10 respectively.

Substitute 7 for a, −11 for b, and 10 for c in the formula for discriminant b2−4ac. Then, multiply the terms, and subtract the terms.

​b2−4ac=(−11)2

−4(7)(10)

=121−280

=−159

The discriminant is equal to −159, which is less than 0.

This means that the equation 7x2−11x+10=0 has two non-real solutions.

Thus, the number of solutions of the given equation is two, and the two solutions are non-real.

The given equation has two solutions.

The two solutions of the given equation are non-real.

Quadratic Equations in HMH Algebra 2 (1st Edition, Module 3, Chapter 3, Exercise 3.3) Page 147 Problem 26 Answer

The given equation is −x2−2/5

x=1.

The question requires to state the number of solutions without solving the equation, and determine whether the solutions are real or non-real.

To answer the question, rewrite the equation in the form ax2+bx+c=0 and identify the values of a,b,c.

Then, calculate the discriminant of the equation, and observe its value to determine the number and type of solutions of the given equation.

Subtract 1 from both sides of −x2−2/5

x=1.​

−x2−2/5

x−1=1−1

−x2−2/5

x−1=0…………(1)

Comparing the equation (1) to the equation ax2+bx+c=0, it can be determined that the values of a,b,c are −1,−2/5,−1 respectively.

Substitute −1 for a, −2/5 for b, and −1 for c in the formula for discriminant b2−4ac. Then, multiply the terms, and subtract the terms.

​b2−4ac=(−2/5)2

−4(−1)(−1)

=4/25−4

=4−100/25

=−96/25

The discriminant is equal to −96/25, which is less than 0.

This means that the equation −x2−2/5 x=1 has two non-real solutions.

Thus, the number of solutions of the given equation is two, and the two solutions are non-real.

The given equation has two solutions.

The two solutions of the given equation are non-real.

Quadratic Equations in HMH Algebra 2 (1st Edition, Module 3, Chapter 3, Exercise 3.3) Page 147 Problem 27 Answer

The given equation is 4x2+9=12x.

The question requires to state the number of solutions without solving the equation, and determine whether the solutions are real or non-real.

To answer the question, rewrite the equation in the form ax2+bx+c=0 and identify the values of a,b,c.

Then, calculate the discriminant of the equation, and observe its value to determine the number and type of solutions of the given equation.

Subtract 12x from both sides of 4x2+9=12x.

​4×2+9−12x=12x−12x

4x2−12x+9=0…………(1)

Comparing the equation (1) to the equation ax2+bx+c=0, it can be determined that the values of a,b,c are 4,−12,9 respectively.

Substitute 4 for a, −12 for b, and 9 for c in the formula for discriminant b2−4ac. Then, multiply the terms, and subtract the terms.

​b2−4ac=(−12)2

−4(4)(9)

=144−144

=0

The discriminant is equal to 0.

This means that the equation 4x2+9=12x has one real solution.

Thus, the number of solutions of the given equation is one, and the solution is real.

The given equation has one solution.

The one solution of the given equation is real.

Quadratic Equations in HMH Algebra 2 (1st Edition, Module 3, Chapter 3, Exercise 3.3) Page 150 Problem 28 Answer

The given table shows seven quadratic functions.

The question requires to complete the given table by placing X marks in the column which corresponds to the number and type of solutions of the given equations.

To complete the table, compare each equation to ax2+bx+c=0 and identify the values of a,b,c.

Then, calculate the discriminant of each equation, and observe its value to determine the number and type of solutions of each given equation.

Finally, use the determined number and type of solutions and place the X mark in the corresponding column for each equation to complete the table.

The first given equation is x2−3x+1=0.

Comparing the equation to the equation ax2+bx+c=0, it can be determined that the values of a,b,c are 1,−3,1 respectively.

Calculate the discriminant of the equation using the formula for discriminant b2−4ac. Then, multiply the terms, and combine the terms.

​b2−4ac=(−3)2

−4(1)(1)

=9−4

=5

The discriminant is equal to 5, which is greater than 0.

This means that the equation x2−3x+1=0 has two real solutions.

The second given equation is x2−2x+1=0.

Comparing the equation to the equation ax2+bx+c=0, it can be determined that the values of a,b,c are 1,−2,1 respectively.

Calculate the discriminant of the equation using the formula for discriminant b2−4ac. Then, multiply the terms, and combine the terms.

b2−4ac=(−2)2

−4(1)(1)

=4−4

=0

The discriminant is equal to 0.

This means that the equation x2−2x+1=0 has one real solution.

The third given equation is x2−x+1=0.

Comparing the equation to the equation ax2+bx+c=0, it can be determined that the values of a,b,care 1,−1,1 respectively.

Calculate the discriminant of the equation using the formula for discriminant b2−4ac. Then, multiply the terms, and combine the terms.

​b2−4ac=(−1)2

−4(1)(1)

=1−4

=−3

The discriminant is equal to −3, which is less than 0.

This means that the equation x2−x+1=0 has two non-real solutions.

The fourth given equation is x2+1=0.

Comparing the equation to the equation ax2+bx+c=0, it can be determined that the values of a,b,c are 1,0,1 respectively.

Calculate the discriminant of the equation using the formula for discriminant b2−4ac. Then, multiply the terms, and combine the terms.

​b2−4ac=(0)2

−4(1)(1)

=0−4

=−4

​The discriminant is equal to −4, which is less than 0.

This means that the equation x2+1=0 has two non-real solutions.

The fifth given equation is x2+x+1=0.

Comparing the equation to the equation ax2+bx+c=0, it can be determined that the values of a,b,c are 1,1,1 respectively.

Calculate the discriminant of the equation using the formula for discriminant b2−4ac. Then, multiply the terms, and combine the terms.

​b2−4ac=(1)2

−4(1)(1)

=1−4

=−3

The discriminant is equal to −3, which is less than 0.

This means that the equation x2+x+1=0 has two non-real solutions.

The sixth given equation is x2+2x+1=0.

Comparing the equation to the equation ax2+bx+c=0, it can be determined that the values of a,b,c are 1,2,1 respectively.

Calculate the discriminant of the equation using the formula for discriminant b2−4ac. Then, multiply the terms, and combine the terms.

​b2−4ac=(2)2

−4(1)(1)

=4−4

=0

The discriminant is equal to 0.

This means that the equation x2+2x+1=0 has one real solution.

The seventh given equation is x2+3x+1=0.

Comparing the equation to the equation ax2+bx+c=0, it can be determined that the values of a,b,c are 1,3,1 respectively.

Calculate the discriminant of the equation using the formula for discriminant b2−4ac. Then, multiply the terms, and combine the terms.

​b2−4ac=(3)2−4(1)(1)

=9−4

=5

The discriminant is equal to 5, which is greater than 0.

This means that the equation x2+3x+1=0 has two real solutions.

Complete the given table by placing X mark in the column which represents the number and type of solutions for each equation.

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 3 Quadratic Equations 28 1

The completed table with the X marks placed in the appropriate columns is:

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 3 Quadratic Equations 28

Quadratic Equations in HMH Algebra 2 (1st Edition, Module 3, Chapter 3, Exercise 3.3) Page 151 Problem 29 Answer

The given equation is −x2+2x−3=0. Also, a student’s attempt at solving the equation by completing the square is given.

The question requires to determine the error in the student’s solution, and correct it.

To find and correct the error, observe the solution and determine whether the student has correctly written the equation in the form x2+bx=c before factoring the left side of the equation, and observe whether the factoring is correct.

Then, rewrite the equation in the form x2+bx=c. Then, identify the value of b, and calculate (b/2)2.

Then, add (b/2)2 on both sides of the rewritten equation, factor the left-side expression using algebraic identities, and use the definition of square root.

Finally, solve the obtained equation to determine the correct solutions of the given equation.

When solving a quadratic equation by completing the square, the quadratic equation is written in the form x2+bx=c before factoring the left side of the equation.

It can be observed that in the student’s solution, the quadratic equation is written as −x2+2x=3 before factoring the left side of the equation.

The coefficient of x2 in the rewritten equation is −1, instead of 1.

Therefore, the error in the solution is that the student has not written the quadratic equation in the form x2+bx=c before factoring the left side of the equation.

Multiply both sides of −x2+2x−3=0 by −1, and then subtract 3 from both sides.

​−1(−x2+2x−3)=−1(0)

x2−2x+3=0

x2−2x=−3……………(1)

Comparing the equation (1) to the equation x2+bx=c, it can be determined that the value of b is −2.

Therefore, the value of (b/2)2 is (−2/2)2

=(−1)2, that is 1.

Add the value of (b/2)2, that is 1, on both sides of equation (1).

Then, factorise the left-hand side expression using the algebraic identity a2−2ab+b2=(a−b)2, and simplify the right-hand side expression.

​x2−2x+1=−3+1

(x−1)2=−3+1

(x−1)2=−2

​Use the definition of square root to simplify (x−1)2=−2.

Then, add 1 on both sides, and rewrite the expression using the imaginary unit i.

​(x−1)2=−2

x−1=±√−2

x=1±√−2

x=1±i√2

Therefore, the correct solutions are x=1+i√2 and x=1−i√2.

The error in the solution is that the student has not written the quadratic equation in the form x2+bx=c before factoring the left side of the equation.

This is because the student has written the quadratic equation in the form −x2+bx=c, where the coefficient of x2 is −1, instead of 1.

The correct solutions are x=1+i√2 and x=1−i√2.

Quadratic Equations in HMH Algebra 2 (1st Edition, Module 3, Chapter 3, Exercise 3.3) Page 151 Problem 30 Answer

 

The given equation is x2+8x+c0.

The question requires to determine the values of c for which the given equation has one real solution, two real solutions, and two non-real solutions.

To determine the values, compare the equation to ax2+bx+c=0 and identify the values of a,b,c. Then, calculate the discriminant of the equation.

Next, take the case where the equation has one real solution, equate the determinant to 0, and solve the equation to determine the value of c.

Similarly, take the cases where the equation has two real or two non-real solutions, form inequalities using the determinant and the number 0, and solve them to determine the values of c for which the equation has two real or two non-real solutions.

It can be observed that the given equation is a quadratic equation of the form ax2+bx+c=0.

Comparing the given equation to the equation ax2+bx+c=0, it can be determined that the values of a,b,c are 1,8,c respectively.

Substitute 1 for a and 8 for b in the formula for discriminant b2−4ac, and multiply the terms.

​b2−4ac=(8)2

−4(1)(c)

=64−4c

The discriminant is equal to 64−4c.

First case: The given equation has one real solution.

If the quadratic equation has one real solution, then the discriminant 64−4c is equal to 0.

Add 4c on both sides of 64−4c=0, and then divide both sides by 4.

​64−4c=0

64=4c

16=c

Therefore, the given equation has one real solution if c=16.

Second case: The given equation has two real solutions.

If the quadratic equation has two real solutions, then the discriminant 64−4c is greater than 0.

Add 4c on both sides of 64−4c>0, and then divide both sides by 4.

​64−4c>0

64>4c

16>c

Therefore, the given equation has two real solutions if c<16.

Third case: The given equation has two non-real solutions. If the quadratic equation has two non-real solutions, then the discriminant 64−4cis less than 0.

Add 4c on both sides of 64−4c<0, and then divide both sides by 4.

​64−4c<0

64<4c

16<c

Therefore, the given equation has two non-real solutions if c>16.

The given equation has one real solution if c=16. two real solutions if c<16, and two non-real solutions if c>16.

Quadratic Equations in HMH Algebra 2 (1st Edition, Module 3, Chapter 3, Exercise 3.3) Page 152 Exercise 1 Answer

It is given that the projectile motion model h(t)=−16t2+v0t+h0 models the ball’s height in t seconds, where v0 is the initial vertical velocity in feet per second, and h0 is the initial height in feet.

Also, it is given that the ball is hit when it is 4 feet above the ground, and it travelled vertically after being hit at the speed 80 feet per second.

Matt’s claim is that the ball must have reached the height 110 feet.

The question requires to model the ball’s height using the given information, and then use the model to determine whether Matt’s claim is correct or not.

To answer the question, use the initial vertical velocity and initial height of the ball in the projectile equation to determine the model for the ball’s height.

Next, let the height h(t) be equal to 110 feet.

Then, use the model and the height to form a quadratic equation in terms of t.

Next, compare the equation to at2+bt+c=0 and identify the values of a,b, and c.

Finally, determine the discriminant of the equation to determine whether the solutions are real or non-real, and thus, determine whether it is possible for the ball to reach a height of 110 feet.

The initial vertical velocity of the ball is the speed at which it travelled vertically after being hit, that is 80 feet per second.

The initial height of the ball is the height at which it is hit, that is 4 feet.

Substitute 80 for v0 and 4 for h0 in the projectile motion model h(t)=−16t2+v0t+h0.

h(t)=−16t2+80t+4

Thus, the model for the height of the ball in t seconds is h(t)=−16t2+80t+4.

Let the height of the ball be 110 feet. Therefore, h(t)=110.

Substitute −16t2+80t+4 for h(t) in h(t)=110, and subtract 110 from both sides.

​−16t2+80t+4=110

−16t2+80t−106=0……………(1)

The equation based on Matt’s claim is −16t2+80t−106=0.

Comparing the equation (1) to the equation at2+bt+c=0, it can be determined that the values of a,b,c are −16,80,−106 respectively.

Substitute −16 for a, 80 for b, and −106 for c in the formula for discriminant b2−4ac. Then, multiply the terms, and subtract the terms.

​b2−4ac=(80)2−4(−16)(−106)

=6400−6784

=−384

The discriminant is equal to −384, which is less than 0.

This means that the equation −16t2+80t−106=0 has two non-real solutions.

Therefore, there is no real value of t for which the height of the ball is equal to 110 feet.

Thus, the ball cannot reach the height equal to 110 feet, and Matt’s claim is not correct.

The model for the height of the ball in t seconds is h(t)=−16t2+80t+4.

The equation based on Matt’s claim is −16t2+80t−106=0.

Matt’s claim is not correct. The ball cannot reach the height equal to 110 feet.

Solutions for Quadratic Equations HMH Algebra 2 Module 3 Exercise 3.3

Quadratic Equations in HMH Algebra 2 (1st Edition, Module 3, Chapter 3, Exercise 3.3) Page 152 Exercise 2 Answer

It is given that the projectile motion model h(t)=−16t2+v0t+h0 models the ball’s height in t seconds, where v0 is the initial vertical velocity in feet per second, and h0 is the initial height in feet.

Also, it is given that the ball is hit when it is 4 feet above the ground, and it travelled vertically after being hit at the speed 80 feet per second.

The question requires to determine whether the ball reaches a height of 100 feet or not, and explain the reasoning.

Given that the model for the height of the ball in t seconds is h(t)=−16t2+80t+4, as determined in the previous part of this exercise.

To answer the question, let the height h(t) be equal to 100 feet. Then, use the model and the height to form a quadratic equation in terms of t.

Next, compare the equation to at2+bt+c=0 and identify the values of a,b, and c.

Finally, determine the discriminant of the equation to determine whether the solutions are real or non-real, and thus, determine whether it is possible for the ball to reach a height of 100 feet.

Let the height of the ball be 100 feet. Therefore, h(t)=100.

Substitute −16t2+80t+4 for h(t) in h(t)=100, and subtract 100 from both sides.​

−16t2+80t+4=100

−16t2+80t−96=0……………(1)

Comparing the equation (1) to the equation at2+bt+c=0, it can be determined that the values of a,b,c are −16,80,−96 respectively.

Substitute −16 for a, 80 for b, and −96 for c in the formula for discriminant b2−4ac. Then, multiply the terms, and subtract the terms.

​b2−4ac=(80)2

−4(−16)(−96)

=6400−6144

=256

The discriminant is equal to 256, which is greater than 0.

This means that the equation h(t)=100 has two real solutions.

Therefore, there is some real value of t for which the height of the ball is equal to 100 feet.

Thus, the ball does reach a height of 100 feet.

The ball does reach a height of 100 feet. This is because the quadratic equation −16t2+80t−96=0

representing the height of the ball as 100

feet has two real solutions. There exists some real value of t for which the height of the ball is equal to 100 feet.

Quadratic Equations in HMH Algebra 2 (1st Edition, Module 3, Chapter 3, Exercise 3.3) Page 152 Exercise 3 Answer

It is given that the projectile motion model h(t)=−16t2+v0t+h0 models the ball’s height in t seconds, where v0 is the initial vertical velocity in feet per second, and h0

is the initial height in feet. Also, it is given that the ball is hit when it is 4 feet above the ground, and it travelled vertically after being hit at the speed 80 feet per second.

Also, hmax represents the maximum height of the ball.

The question requires to show how the value of hmax can be found using the discriminant of the quadratic formula.

Given that the model for the height of the ball in t seconds is h(t)=−16t2+80t+4, as determined in part (a) of this exercise.

To determine the maximum height, let the height h(t) be equal to hmax.

Then, use the model and the height to form a quadratic equation in terms of t.

Next, compare the equation to at2+bt+c=0 and identify the values of a,b, and c.

Then, determine the discriminant of the equation and equate it to 0 to form a linear equation in terms of hmax.

Finally, solve the equation for hmax to determine the maximum height, and explain how it is calculated.

Let the height of the ball be maximum. Therefore, h(t)=hmax.

Substitute −16t2+80t+4 for h(t) in h(t)=hmax, and subtract hmax from both sides.​

−16t2+80t+4=hmax

−16t2+80t+(4−hmax)=0……………(1)

Comparing the equation (1) to the equation at2+bt+c=0, it can be determined that the values of a,b,c are −16,80,4−hmax respectively.

Substitute −16 for a, 80 for b, and 4−hmax for c in the formula for discriminant b2−4ac. Then, multiply the terms, and combine the terms.

​b2−4ac=(80)2−4(−16)(4−hmax)

=6400+256−64hmax

=6656−64hmax

The discriminant is equal to 6656−64hmax.

The solutions of the equation −16t2+80t+(4−hmax)=0 represent the time at which the ball reaches the maximum height.

The ball reaches the maximum height only once. This is because after reaching the maximum height, it starts falling down.

Therefore, the equation −16t2+80t+(4−hmax)=0 has only one real solution.

Thus, the discriminant of the equation should be equal to 0.

Equate the discriminant 6656−64hmax to 0, add 64hmax on both sides, and divide both sides by 64.

6656−64hmax=0

6656=64hmax

6656/64=hmax

104=hmax

Therefore, the maximum height of the ball is 104 feet.

Thus, the maximum height is calculated by using the model and the maximum height to form the equation −16t2+80t+(4−hmax)=0, calculating the discriminant and equating it to 0, and finally solving the resulting linear equation for hmax.

The ball does reach a maximum height of 104 feet.

This is calculated by writing the equation −16t2 +80t+(4−hmax)=0 using the given model, calculating the discriminant of the equation, equating the discriminant to 0, and solving the resulting equation for hmax.

The discriminant of the equation is equated to 0 because the ball reaches the maximum height only once.

Quadratic Equations in HMH Algebra 2 (1st Edition, Module 3, Chapter 3, Exercise 3.3) Page 152 Exercise 4 Answer

It is given that the projectile motion model h(t)=−16t2+v0t+h0 models the ball’s height in t seconds, where v0 is the initial vertical velocity in feet per second, and h0

is the initial height in feet. Also, it is given that the ball is hit when it is 4 feet above the ground, and it travelled vertically after being hit at the speed 80 feet per second.

The question requires to determine the time when the ball reaches its maximum height.

Given that the model for the height of the ball in t seconds is h(t)=−16t2+80t+4, as determined in part (a) of this exercise.

Given that the maximum height of the ball is 104 feet, as determined in the previous part of this exercise.

To answer the question, let the height h(t) be equal to the maximum height of 104 feet.

Then, use the model and the height to form a quadratic equation in terms of t, and compare the equation to at2+bt+c=0 to identify the values of a,b,c.

Finally, use the quadratic formula, and simplify the expression to determine the time when the ball reaches its maximum height.

Let the height of the ball be the maximum height of 104 feet. Therefore, h(t)=104.

Substitute −16t2+80t+4 for h(t) in h(t)=104, and subtract 104 from both sides.

​−16t2+80t+4=104

−16t2+80t−100=0……………(1)

Comparing the equation (1) to the equation at2+bt+c=0, it can be determined that the values of a,b,c are −16,80,−100 respectively.

Substitute −16 for a, 80 for b, and −100 for c

in the quadratic formula t=−b±√b2−4ac/2a.

Then, multiply the terms, combine the terms in the square root, and simplify the expression.

t=−(80)±√(80)2−4(−16)(−100)/2(−16)

t=−80±√6400−6400/−32

t=−80±√0/−32

t=−80/−32

t=2.5

Therefore, the time in which the ball reaches its maximum height is 2.5 seconds.

The ball reaches the maximum height in 2.5 seconds.

Quadratic Equations in HMH Algebra 2 (1st Edition, Module 3, Chapter 3, Exercise 3.3) Page 153 Exercise 5 Answer

A quadratic equation can be used to model a real-world problem.

Then, the equation can be solved for one variable by using completing the square method, factoring, or the quadratic formula, and thus, obtain the required solutions.

For example: There is a rectangular field which has an area equal to 875

square feet, and the ratio of its length and width is 7:5. It is required to determine the dimensions of the field.

The length and width of the field can be written as 7m and 5m respectively.

Since the area is given as 875 square feet, the area can be modelled using the quadratic equation 7m⋅5m=875.

This equation can be solved to obtain the values of m, and thus, obtain the dimensions of the rectangular field.

Thus, the real-world problems can be modelled using quadratic equations, and then solved to determine the required solutions.

Quadratic equations can be used to model real-world problems such as the area of a rectangular field when the ratio of the dimensions is given.

Then, the given area can be substituted in the equation, and the quadratic equation can be solved using completing the square method, factoring, or the quadratic formula to obtain the solutions.

The accepted solution can then be used to determine the dimensions of the rectangular field. Similarly, other real-world problems can be solved using quadratic equations.

Quadratic Equations in HMH Algebra 2 (1st Edition, Module 3, Chapter 3, Exercise 3.3) Page 154 Exercise 6 Answer

The given equation is x2−16=0.

The question requires to solve the given equation by taking square roots.

To solve the equation, isolate the square x2 on one side of the equation using addition, and use the definition of square root to simplify the expression.

Add 16 on both sides of x2−16=0, use the definition of square root, and simplify the square root to solve the equation.

​x2−16+16=0+16

x2=16

x=±√16

x=±4

Thus, the required solutions are x=±4.

The required solutions are x=±4.

Quadratic Equations in HMH Algebra 2 (1st Edition, Module 3, Chapter 3, Exercise 3.3) Page 154 Exercise 7 Answer

The given equation is 2x2−10=0.

The question requires to solve the given equation by taking square roots.

To solve the equation, isolate the square x2 on one side of the equation using addition and division, and use the definition of square root to simplify the expression.

Add 10 on both sides of 2x −10=0, and then divide both sides by 2.

​2x2−10+10=0+10

2x2=10

2x2/2=10/2

x2=5

​Use the definition of square root to solve the equation x2=5.

​x2=5

x=±√5

Thus, the required solutions are x=±√5.

The required solutions are x=±√5.

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 Exercise 3.3 Quadratic Equations guide

Quadratic Equations in HMH Algebra 2 (1st Edition, Module 3, Chapter 3, Exercise 3.3) Page 154 Exercise 8 Answer

The given equation is x2+6x+10=0.

The question requires to solve the given equation by completing the square.

To solve the equation by completing the square, rewrite the equation in the form x2+bx=c. Then, identify the value of b, and calculate (b/2)2.

Then, add (b/2)2 on both sides of the rewritten equation, factor the left-side expression using algebraic identities, and use the definition of square root.

Finally, solve the obtained equation to determine the required solutions.

Subtract 10 from both sides of x2+6x+10=0.

​x2+6x+10−10=0−10

x2+6x=−10……………(1)

Comparing the equation (1) to the equation x2+bx=c, it can be determined that the value of b is 6.

Therefore, the value of (b/2)2 is (6/2)2=(3)2, that is 9.

Add the value of (b/2)2, that is 9, on both sides of equation (1).

Then, factorise the left-hand side expression using the algebraic identity a2+2ab+b2=(a+b)2, and simplify the right-hand side expression.

x2+6x+9=−10+9

(x+3)2=−10+9

(x+3)2=−1

​Use the definition of square root to simplify (x+3)2=−1. Then, subtract 3 from both sides, and rewrite the expression using the imaginary unit i.

​(x+3)2=−1

x+3=±√−1

x=−3±√−1

x=−3±i

Therefore, the required solutions are x=−3+i and x=−3−i.

The required solutions are x=−3+i and x=−3−i.

Quadratic Equations in HMH Algebra 2 (1st Edition, Module 3, Chapter 3, Exercise 3.3) Page 154 Exercise 9 Answer

The given equation is x2−4x+4=0.

The question requires to solve the given equation by factoring it.

To solve the equation, write the pair of factors of the constant, and identify the pair of factors whose sum is equal to the coefficient of the middle term.

Then, factorise the left-hand side of the given quadratic equation, solve it to obtain the values of x, and thus, obtain the required solution.

The constant in the given quadratic equation is 4.

Write the pair of factors of the constant 4.

1 and 4

2 and 2

−1 and −4

−2 and −2

It can be observed that the sum of the pair of factors −2 and −2 is equal to the coefficient of the middle term in the given quadratic equation, that is −4.

Therefore, the left-hand side of the given quadratic equation can be factorised as (x−2)(x−2).

Thus, the equation becomes (x−2)(x−2)=0.

The equation (x−2)(x−2)=0 is true only when x−2 is equal to 0.

When x−2 is equal to 0, the value of x is equal to 2.

Thus, the required solution is x=2.

The required solution is x=2.

Quadratic Equations in HMH Algebra 2 (1st Edition, Module 3, Chapter 3, Exercise 3.3) Page 154 Exercise 10 Answer

The given equation is x2−x−30=0.

The question requires to solve the given equation by factoring it.

To solve the equation, write the pair of factors of the constant, and identify the pair of factors whose sum is equal to the coefficient of the middle term.

Then, factorise the left-hand side of the given quadratic equation, solve it to obtain the values of x, and thus, obtain the required solutions.

The constant in the given quadratic equation is −30.

Write the pair of factors of the constant −30.

1 and −30

2 and −15

3 and −10

5 and −6

6 and −5

10 and −3

15 and −2

30 and −1

It can be observed that the sum of the pair of factors 5 and −6 is equal to the coefficient of the middle term in the given quadratic equation, that is −1.

Therefore, the left-hand side of the given quadratic equation can be factorised as (x+5)(x−6).

Thus, the equation becomes (x+5)(x−6)=0.

The equation (x+5)(x−6)=0 is true only when either x+5 is equal to 0, or x−6 is equal to 0.

When x+5 is equal to 0, the value of x is equal to −5.

When x−6 is equal to 0, the value of x is equal to 6.

Thus, the required solutions are x=−5 and x=6.

The required solutions are x=−5 and x=6.

Quadratic Equations in HMH Algebra 2 (1st Edition, Module 3, Chapter 3, Exercise 3.3) Page 154 Exercise 11 Answer

Assume the quadratic equation ax2+bx+c=0. First, the quadratic equation is rewritten in the form x2+b/a

x+c/a=0 by division, such that the coefficient of x2 is 1.Then, the constant in the quadratic equation is identified, that is the value of c/a.

Then, the pair of factors of the constant c/a are written. Next, the pair of factors whose sum is equal to coefficient of the middle term is chosen.

In the rewritten quadratic equation, the coefficient of the middle term is b/a.

Therefore, if there is a pair of factors p and q of the constant c/a, that is pq=c/a, then the sum of the factors p and q is b/a.

This means that if there is no pair of factors of the constant c/a whose sum is not equal to the coefficient of the middle term is b/a, then the quadratic equation cannot be solved by factoring.

Thus, a quadratic equation of the form x2+bx+c=0 can be solved by factoring only if there exists a pair of factors of the constant whose sum is equal to the coefficient of the middle term.

It is possible to solve a quadratic equation by factoring if there exists a pair of factors of the constant whose sum is equal to the coefficient of the middle term.

The constant and coefficient of middle term are taken only after writing the equation such that the coefficient of x2 is 1.

Quadratic Equations in HMH Algebra 2 (1st Edition, Module 3, Chapter 3, Exercise 3.3) Page 154 Exercise 12 Answer

The complex solutions of a quadratic equation can be calculated either by completing the square, or by using the quadratic formula.

To complete the square and calculate the complex solutions of a quadratic equation, first the equation is rewritten in the form x2+bx=c. Next, the value of b is identified, and (b/2)2 is calculated.

The value of (b/2)2 is added on both sides of the rewritten equation, and the left-side of the equation is factorised.

Finally, the definition of square root is used, and the equation is solved for the required values of x.

Each quadratic equation is in the form ax2+bx+c=0.This equation can be written in the form x2+b/a

x=−c/a using subtraction and division.

Therefore, it is possible to solve the equation by completing the square. Thus, every quadratic equation can be solved by completing the square.

Every quadratic equation can be solved by completing the square because each quadratic equation can be written in the form x2+bx=c using operations of addition, subtraction, multiplication, and/or division.

Quadratic Equations in HMH Algebra 2 (1st Edition, Module 3, Chapter 3, Exercise 3.3) Page 155 Exercise 13 Answer

The given equation is 2x2−16=0.

The question requires to solve the given equation.

To solve the equation, isolate the square x2 on one side of the equation using addition and division.

Then, use the definition of square root and the product property of square roots to simplify the expression.

Add 16 on both sides of 2x2−16=0, and then divide both sides by 2.

​2x2−16+16=0+16

2x2=16

2x2/2

=16/2

x2=8

​Use the definition of square root to solve the equation x2=8, use the product property of square roots, and simplify the expression.

​x2=8

x=±√8

x=±√4⋅2

x=±√4⋅√2

x=±2√2

Thus, the required solutions are x=±2√2.

The required solutions are x=±2√2.

Quadratic Equations in HMH Algebra 2 (1st Edition, Module 3, Chapter 3, Exercise 3.3) Page 155 Exercise 14 Answer

The given equation is 2x2−6x−20=0.

The question requires to solve the given equation.

To solve the equation, first remove the common factor from the equation.

Then, write the pair of factors of the constant, and identify the pair of factors whose sum is equal to the coefficient of the middle term.

Then, factorise the left-hand side of the quadratic equation, solve it to obtain the values of x, and thus, obtain the required solutions.

Divide both sides of 2x2−6x−20=0 by 2.

​2x2−6x−20/2=0/2

x2−3x−10=0

Thus, the given quadratic equation becomes x2−3x−10=0.

The constant in the quadratic equation x2−3x−10=0 is −10.

Write the pair of factors of the constant −10.

1 and −10

2 and −5

5 and −2

10 and −1

It can be observed that the sum of the pair of factors 2 and −5 is equal to the coefficient of the middle term in the rewritten quadratic equation x2−3x−10=0, that is −3.

Therefore, the left-hand side of the rewritten quadratic equation can be factorised as (x+2)(x−5).

Thus, the equation becomes (x+2)(x−5)=0.

The equation (x+2)(x−5)=0 is true only when either x+2 is equal to 0, or x−5 is equal to 0.

When x+2 is equal to 0, the value of x is equal to −2.

When x−5 is equal to 0, the value of x is equal to 5.

Thus, the required solutions are x=−2 and x=5.

The required solutions are x=−2 and x=5.

Quadratic Equations in HMH Algebra 2 (1st Edition, Module 3, Chapter 3, Exercise 3.3) Page 155 Exercise 15 Answer

The given equation is 2x2+2x−2=0.

The question requires to solve the given equation.

To solve the equation, rewrite the equation in the form x2+bx=c.

Then, identify the value of b, and calculate (b/2)2. Then, add (b/2)2 on both sides of the rewritten equation, factor the left-side expression using algebraic identities, and use the definition of square root.

Finally, solve the obtained equation and use the quotient property of square roots to determine the required solutions.

Add 2 on both sides of 2x2+2x−2=0, and then divide both sides by 2.

​2x2+2x−2+2=0+2

2x2+2x=2

2x2+2x/2=2/2

x2+x=1……………(1)

Comparing the equation (1) to the equation x2+bx=c, it can be determined that the value of b is 1.

Therefore, the value of (b/2)2 is (1/2)2=1/4.

Add the value of (b/2)2, that is 1/4, on both sides of equation (1).

Then, factorise the left-hand side expression using the algebraic identity a2+2ab+b2=(a+b)2, and simplify the right-hand side expression.

​x2+x+1/4=1+1/4

(x+1/2)2=1+1/4

(x+1/2)2=5/4

Use the definition of square root to simplify (x+1/2)2=5/4, and then subtract 1/2 from both sides.

​(x+1/2)2=5/4

x+1/2=±√5/4

x=−1/2±√5/4

Apply the quotient property of square roots, and simplify the square root in the denominator.

​x=−1/2±√5/√4

x=−1/2±√5/2

x=−1±√5/2

Therefore, the required solutions are x=−1+√5/2 and x=−1−√5/2.

The required solutions are x=−1+√5/2 and x=−1−√5/2.

Quadratic Equations in HMH Algebra 2 (1st Edition, Module 3, Chapter 3, Exercise 3.3) Page 155 Exercise 16 Answer

The given equation is x2+x=30.

The question requires to solve the given equation by factoring it.

To solve the equation, first rewrite the given equation in standard form using subtraction.

Then, write the pair of factors of the constant, and identify the pair of factors whose sum is equal to the coefficient of the middle term.

Then, factorise the left-hand side of the quadratic equation, solve it to obtain the values of x, and thus, obtain the required solutions.

Subtract 30 from both sides of x2+x=30.​

x2+x−30=30−30

x2+x−30=0

Thus, the given quadratic equation becomes x2+x−30=0.

The constant in the quadratic equation x2+x−30=0 is −30.

Write the pair of factors of the constant −30.

1 and −30

2 and −15

3 and −10

5 and −6

6 and −5

10 and −3

15 and −2

30 and −1

It can be observed that the sum of the pair of factors 6 and −5 is equal to the coefficient of the middle term in the rewritten quadratic equation x2+x−30=0, that is 1.

Therefore, the left-hand side of the rewritten quadratic equation can be factorised as (x+6)(x−5).

Thus, the equation becomes (x+6)(x−5)=0.

The equation (x+6)(x−5)=0 is true only when either x+6 is equal to 0, or x−5 is equal to 0.

When x+6 is equal to 0, the value of x is equal to −6.

When x−5 is equal to 0, the value of x is equal to 5.

Thus, the required solutions are x=−6 and x=5.

The required solutions are x=−6 and x=5.

Quadratic Equations in HMH Algebra 2 (1st Edition, Module 3, Chapter 3, Exercise 3.3) Page 155 Exercise 17 Answer

The given equation is x2−5x=24.

The question requires to solve the given equation by factoring it.

To solve the equation, first rewrite the given equation in standard form using subtraction.

Then, write the pair of factors of the constant, and identify the pair of factors whose sum is equal to the coefficient of the middle term.

Then, factorise the left-hand side of the quadratic equation, solve it to obtain the values of x, and thus, obtain the required solutions.

Subtract 24 from both sides of x2−5x=24.

​x2−5x−24=24−24

x2−5x−24=0

Thus, the given quadratic equation becomes x2−5x−24=0

The constant in the quadratic equation x2−5x−24=0 is −24.

Write the pair of factors of the constant −24.

1 and −24

2 and −12

3 and −8

4 and −6

6 and −4

8 and −3

12 and −2

24 and −1

It can be observed that the sum of the pair of factors 3 and −8 is equal to the coefficient of the middle term in the rewritten quadratic equation x2−5x−24=0, that is −5.

Therefore, the left-hand side of the rewritten quadratic equation can be factorised as (x+3)(x−8).

Thus, the equation becomes (x+3)(x−8)=0.

The equation (x+3)(x−8)=0 is true only when either x+3 is equal to 0, or x−8 is equal to 0.

When x+3 is equal to 0, the value of x is equal to −3.

When x−8 is equal to 0, the value of x is equal to 8.

Thus, the required solutions are x=−3 and x=8.

The required solutions are x=−3 and x=8.

Quadratic Equations in HMH Algebra 2 (1st Edition, Module 3, Chapter 3, Exercise 3.3) Page 155 Exercise 18 Answer

The given equation is −4x2+8=24.

The question requires to solve the given equation.To solve the equation, isolate the square x2 on one side of the equation using subtraction and division.

Then, use the definition of square root, the product property of square roots, and the imaginary unit i to simplify and rewrite the expression.

Subtract 8 from both sides of −4x2+8=24, and then divide both sides by −4.

​−4x2+8−8=24−8

−4x2=16

−4x2−4=16−4

x2=−4

​Use the definition of square root to solve the equation x2=−4, use the product property of square roots, and rewrite the expression using the imaginary unit i.

​x2=−4

x=±√−4

x=±√(4)(−1)

x=±√4⋅√−1

x=±2i

Thus, the required solutions are x=±2i.

The required solutions are x=±2i.

Quadratic Equations in HMH Algebra 2 (1st Edition, Module 3, Chapter 3, Exercise 3.3) Page 155 Exercise 19 Answer

The given equation is x2+30=24.

The question requires to solve the given equation.

To solve the equation, isolate the square x2 on one side of the equation using subtraction.

Then, use the definition of square root, the product property of square roots, and the imaginary unit i

to simplify and rewrite the expression.

Subtract 30 from both sides of x2+30=24 and then use the definition of square root to solve the equation.

​x2+30−30=24−30

x2=−6

x=±√−6

Use the product property of square roots to rewrite the square root in x=±√−6, and rewrite the expression using the imaginary unit i.

​x=±√−6

x=±√(−1)(6)

x=±√−1⋅√6

x=±i√6

Thus, the required solutions are x=±i√6.

The required solutions are x=±i√6.

Quadratic Equations in HMH Algebra 2 (1st Edition, Module 3, Chapter 3, Exercise 3.3) Page 155 Exercise 20 Answer

The given equation is x2+4x+3=0.

The question requires to solve the given equation.

To solve the equation, write the pair of factors of the constant, and identify the pair of factors whose sum is equal to the coefficient of the middle term.

Then, factorise the left-hand side of the given quadratic equation, solve it to obtain the values of x, and thus, obtain the required solutions.

The constant in the given quadratic equation is 3.

Write the pair of factors of the constant 3.

1 and 3

−1 and −3

It can be observed that the sum of the pair of factors 1 and 3 is equal to the coefficient of the middle term in the given quadratic equation, that is 4.

  • Therefore, the left-hand side of the given quadratic equation can be factorised as (x+1)(x+3).
  • Thus, the equation becomes (x+1)(x+3)=0.
  • The equation (x+1)(x+3)=0 is true only when either x+1 is equal to 0, or x+3 is equal to 0.
  • When x+1 is equal to 0, the value of x is equal to −1.
  • When x+3 is equal to 0, the value of x is equal to −3.
  • Thus, the required solutions are x=−3 and x=−1.
  • The required solutions are x=−3 and x=−1.

HMH Algebra 2 Quadratic Equations Module 3 Exercise 3.3 answer key

Quadratic Equations in HMH Algebra 2 (1st Edition, Module 3, Chapter 3, Exercise 3.3) Page 155 Exercise 21 Answer

  • The given equation is 7m⋅5m=875.Assume that there is a rectangular field which has an area equal to 875 square feet, and the ratio of its length and width is 7:5.
  • The length and width of the field can be written as 7m and 5m respectively.
  • Therefore, the area 875 square feet of the rectangular field would be the product of 7m and 5m, that is 7m⋅5m=875.
  • Thus, the given equation can be used to model the situation where the area of a rectangular field is 875 square feet, and the ratio of its length and width is 7:5.
  • The equation 7m⋅5m=875 can be used to model the situation where the ratio of the length and width of a rectangular field is 7:5, and its area is 875 square feet.

Quadratic Equations in HMH Algebra 2 (1st Edition, Module 3, Chapter 3, Exercise 3.3) Page 156 Exercise 22 Answer

The given quadratic function is f(x)=ax2+bx+c. Assume that a>0.

  • When the value of x moves away from the x-coordinate of the vertex of the graph of the function f(x), the value of f(x) increases.
  • This means that the graph of the function f(x)=ax2+bx+c forms a parabola opening upward when the leading coefficient a>0, and forms a U-shaped graph.
  • Assume that a<0. When the value of x
  • moves away from the x-coordinate of the vertex of the graph of the function f(x), the value of f(x) decreases.
  • This means that the graph of the function f(x)=ax2+bx+c forms a parabola opening downward when the leading coefficient a<0, and forms an inverted U-shaped graph.
  • Assume that a=0. When a is equal to 0, the given function becomes f(x)=bx+c.
  • This means that when a=0, the function is linear and not quadratic.
  • Therefore, the graph of the function is a straight line when a=0.

The graph of the quadratic function opens upward when a>0 because if the leading coefficient a is positive, then the value of f(x) increases as the value of x moves away from the x-coordinate of the vertex of f(x), and forms a U-shaped graph.

The graph of the quadratic function opens downward when a<0 because if the leading coefficient a is negative, then the value of f(x) decreases as the value of x moves away from the x

-coordinate of the vertex of f(x), and forms an inverted U-shaped graph.

When a=0, the given function is a linear function, and not a quadratic function. The graph of the function would be a straight line.

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Module 3 Chapter 3 Exercise 3.2 Quadratic Equations

Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Module 3 Quadratic Equations

Page 127 Problem 1 Answer

A complex number is a number that is of the form a+bi, where a and b are real numbers, and i is the imaginary unit equal to √−1.

Consider the two arbitrary complex numbers a+bi and c+di.The sum of the two complex numbers can be written as (a+bi)+(c+di)

. In the sum, the terms a and c, and the terms bi and di are like terms.By grouping the like terms, the sum can be written as (a+bi)+(c+di)=(a+c)+(bi+di).

The right-hand side of the sum can be simplified by combining the like terms in the parentheses to find the simplified sum of the two complex numbers.

The difference of the two complex numbers can be written as (a+bi)−(c+di). In the difference, the terms a and c, and the terms bi and di are like terms.

By grouping the like terms, the difference can be written as (a+bi)−(c+di)=(a−c)+(bi−di).

The right-hand side of the difference can be simplified by combining the like terms in the parentheses to find the simplified difference of the two complex numbers.

Thus, the sum and difference of two complex numbers can be determined by grouping the like terms, that is the real parts and the imaginary parts, and then combining the like terms.

When a+bi and c+di are multiplied using the distributive property of multiplication, the product is (a+bi)(c+di)=ac+adi+bci+bdi2.Using the value of i2 and simplifying the expression, the resulting expression is (a+bi)(c+di)=ac+(ad+bc)i−bd.

The right-hand side of the equation can be grouped as (ac−bd)+(ad+bc)i.

Thus, the product of two complex numbers can be determined by using the distributive property of multiplication, combining the like terms, and then using the value of i2 to simplify the product.

A number is called a complex number if it can be written in the form a+bi, where a and b are real numbers, and i is the imaginary unit equal to √−1.

Two complex numbers can be added or subtracted by writing the expression for the sum or difference, grouping the like terms, that is the real parts and the imaginary parts, and then combining the like terms.

Two complex numbers can be multiplied by using the distributive property of multiplication, combining the like terms, and then using the value of i2 to simplify the product.

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Module 3 Chapter 3 Exercise 3.2 Quadratic Equations

Hmh Algebra 2 Volume 1 Module 3 Chapter 3 Exercise 3.2 Solutions

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Module 3 Chapter 3 Exercise 3.2 Quadratic Equations Page 127 Problem 2 Answer

The given binomials are 3+4x and 2−x.

The question requires to add the binomials 3+4x and 2−x.

To add the binomials, group the like terms in the sum using parentheses, and then combine the like terms in the expression.

Write the sum of 3+4x and 2−x, group the like terms in parentheses, and combine the like terms in the parentheses.​

(3+4x)+(2−x)=(3+2)+(4x+(−x))

=(3+2)+(4x−x)

=5+3x

Thus, the required sum is 5+3x.

The required sum is 5+3x.

Page 127 Problem 3 Answer

The given binomials are 3+4x and 2−x.

The question requires to subtract 2−x from 3+4x.

To subtract the binomials, rewrite the difference as a sum, group the like terms in the sum using parentheses, and then combine the like terms in the expression.

Write the difference of 2−x from 3+4x, and rewrite the subtraction as addition.

Then, group the like terms in parentheses, and combine the like terms in the parentheses.

(3+4x)−(2−x)=(3+4x)+(−2+x)

=(3+(−2))+(4x+x)

=(3−2)+(4x+x)

=1+5x

Thus, the required difference is 1+5x.

The required difference is 1+5x.

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Module 3 Chapter 3 Exercise 3.2 Quadratic Equations Page 127 Problem 4 Answer

The given binomials are 3+4x and 2−x.

The question requires to multiply the binomials 3+4x and 2−x.

To multiply the binomials, use the FOIL method, and then combine the like terms.

Write the product of 3+4x and 2−x, use the FOIL method, and combine the like terms.​

(3+4x)(2−x)=6+(−3x)+8x+(−4x2)

=6−3x+8x−4x2

=6+5x−4x2

Thus, the required product is 6+5x−4x2.

The required product is 6+5x−4x2.

Page 127 Problem 5 Answer

The given equation is (3+4x)+(2−x)=5+3x.

The question requires to write the equation obtained if x is equal to the imaginary unit i.

To obtain the required equation, replace the variable x by the imaginary unit i on both sides of the given equation.

Substitute i for x on both sides of (3+4x)+(2−x)=5+3x.

(3+4i)+(2−i)=5+3i

Thus, the required equation is (3+4i)+(2−i)=5+3i.

The required equation is (3+4i)+(2−i)=5+3i.

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Module 3 Chapter 3 Exercise 3.2 Quadratic Equations Page 127 Problem 6 Answer

The given equation is (3+4x)(2−x)=6+5x−4x2.

The question requires to write the equation obtained if x is equal to the imaginary unit i.

Also, it is required to explain how the right side of the obtained equation can be simplified further.

To obtain the required equation, replace the variable x by the imaginary unit i on both sides of the given equation.

Then, use the value of i2 to simplify the right side of the equation further.

Substitute i for x on both sides of (3+4x)(2−x)=6+5x−4x2.

(3+4i)(2−i)=6+5i−4i2

Thus, the required equation is (3+4i)(2−i)=6+5i−4i2.

The right side of the equation contains the square i2, which is equal to −1.

Substitute −1 for i2 on the right side of (3+4i)(2−i)=6+5i−4i2, and simplify the equation.​

(3+4i)(2−i)=6+5i−4(−1)

(3+4i)(2−i)=6+5i+4

(3+4i)(2−i)=10+5i

Thus, the right side of the equation can be simplified as 10+5i.

The required equation is (3+4i)(2−i)=6+5i−4i2.

The right side of the obtained equation is 6+5i−4i2, which contains the square i2.

The right side can be further simplified by substituting −1 for i2, and then combining the like terms to simplify the right side as 10+5i.

Page 128 Problem 7 Answer

The given number is −7i, which can be written as the complex number 0−7i.

Therefore, the real part of −7i is 0 and the imaginary part of −7i is −7.

Since the given number can be written as the complex number 0−7i having the real part 0, it belongs to the set of imaginary numbers and the set of complex numbers.

The real part and imaginary part of −7i are 0 and −7 respectively.

The given number −7i belongs to the set of imaginary numbers and the set of complex numbers.

Hmh Algebra 2 Module 3 Chapter 3 Quadratic Equations Answers

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Module 3 Chapter 3 Exercise 3.2 Quadratic Equations Page 129 Problem 8 Answer

The given number is −1+i, which can be written as the complex number −1+1⋅i.

Therefore, the real part of −1+i is −1 and the imaginary part of −1+i is 1.

Since the given number can be written as the complex number −1+1⋅i having nonzero real and imaginary parts, it belongs to only the set of complex numbers.

The real part and imaginary part of −1+i are −1 and 1 respectively.

The given number −1+i belongs to only the set of complex numbers.

Page 129 Problem 9 Answer

The given sum is (a+bi)+(a−bi). The numbers a and b are real.

The question requires to determine and explain whether the sum (a+bi)+(a−bi) is a real number or an imaginary number.

To answer the question, group the like terms in the sum using parentheses, and then combine the like terms in the expression.

Then, observe the real and imaginary parts of the sum, and determine whether the number is real or imaginary.

Group the real and imaginary parts in the sum (a+bi)+(a−bi), and then combine the like terms.​

(a+bi)+(a−bi)=(a+a)+(bi−bi)

=2a+0

=2a

Thus, the required sum is 2a.

The sum 2a can be written as the complex number 2a+0i.

Therefore, the real and imaginary part of 2a are 2a and 0 respectively.

Since the imaginary part of the sum 2a is 0, the sum 2a is a real number.

The sum (a+bi)+(a−bi) is a real number because the sum is equal to 2a, and the imaginary part of 2a is equal to 0.

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Module 3 Chapter 3 Exercise 3.2 Quadratic Equations Page 129 Problem 10 Answer

The given difference is (17−6i)−(9+10i).

The question requires to subtract the complex numbers in the given difference.

To subtract the complex numbers, rewrite the difference as a sum, group the like terms in the sum using parentheses, and then combine the like terms in the expression.

Rewrite the subtraction of the complex numbers in (17−6i)−(9+10i) as addition.

Then, group the real and imaginary parts, and combine the like terms.​

(17−6i)−(9+10i)=(17−6i)+(−9−10i)

=(17−9)+(−6i−10i)

=8−16i

Thus, the required difference is 8−16i.

The required difference is 8−16i.

Page 129 Problem 11 Answer

The given difference is (18+27i)−(2+3i).

The question requires to subtract the complex numbers in the given difference.

To subtract the complex numbers, rewrite the difference as a sum, group the like terms in the sum using parentheses, and then combine the like terms in the expression.

Rewrite the subtraction of the complex numbers in (18+27i)−(2+3i) as addition. Then, group the real and imaginary parts, and combine the like terms.

​(18+27i)−(2+3i)=(18+27i)+(−2−3i)

=(18−2)+(27i−3i)

=16+24i

Thus, the required difference is 16+24i.

The required difference is 16+24i.

Page 130 Problem 12 Answer

The given product is (6−5i)(3−10i).

The question requires to multiply the complex numbers in the given product.

To multiply the complex numbers, use the distributive property of multiplication and the value of i2, and simplify the expression.

Apply the distributive property of multiplication in the given product (6−5i)(3−10i), and then combine the like terms.

​(6−5i)(3−10i)=18−60i−15i+50i2

=18−75i+50i2

Substitute −1 for i2, and then simplify the expression.

(6−5i)(3−10i)=18−75i+50(−1)

=18−75i−50

=−32−75i

Thus, the required product is −32−75i.

The required product is −32−75i.

Hmh Algebra 2 Chapter 3 Quadratic Equations Exercise 3.2 Key

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Module 3 Chapter 3 Exercise 3.2 Quadratic Equations Page 130 Problem 13 Answer

The given product is (8+15i)(11+i).

The question requires to multiply the complex numbers in the given product.

To multiply the complex numbers, use the distributive property of multiplication and the value of i2, and simplify the expression.

Apply the distributive property of multiplication in the given product (8+15i)(11+i), and then combine the like terms.

​(8+15i)(11+i)=88+8i+165i+15i2

=88+173i+15i2

Substitute −1 for i2, and then simplify the expression.

(8+15i)(11+i)=88+173i+15(−1)

=88+173i−15

=73+173i

Thus, the required product is 73+173i.

The required product is 73+173i.

Page 130 Problem 14 Answer

The given product is (−3+12i)(7+4i).

The question requires to multiply the complex numbers in the given product.

To multiply the complex numbers, use the distributive property of multiplication and the value of i2, and simplify the expression.

Apply the distributive property of multiplication in the given product (−3+12i)(7+4i), and then combine the like terms.​

(−3+12i)(7+4i)=−21−12i+84i+48i2

=−21+72i+48i2

Substitute −1 for i2, and then simplify the expression.​

(−3+12i)(7+4i)=−21+72i+48(−1)

=−21+72i−48

=−69+72i​

Thus, the required product is −69+72i.he required product is −69+72i.

Page 131 Problem 15 Answer

The given diagram shows the components in a circuit. The given current I is 24+12i amps.

The question requires to determine the voltage of each component of the circuit.

To determine the voltage of each component, use the diagram to write the impedance of each component.

Then, use the impedance and current in the Ohm’s law to determine the required voltage of each component.

From the circuit diagram, it can be observed that the resistor is labelled 4 ohms.

Therefore, the impedance of the resistor can be represented by the complex number 4.

The inductor is labelled 3 ohms. Therefore, the impedance of the inductor can be represented by the complex number 3i.

The capacitor is labelled 5 ohms. Therefore, the impedance of the capacitor can be represented by the complex number −5i.

Substitute 24+12i for I and 4 for Z in the Ohm’s law V=I⋅Z, and multiply the terms.​

V=(24+12i)(4)

=96+48i

Thus, the voltage of the resistor is 96+48i volts.

Substitute 24+12i for I and 3i for Z in the Ohm’s law V=I⋅Z, and multiply the terms, and substitute −1 for i2.

V=(24+12i)(3i)

=72i+36i2

=72i+36(−1)

=−36+72i

Thus, the voltage of the inductor is −36+72i volts.

Substitute 24+12i for I and −5i for Z in the Ohm’s law V=I⋅Z, and multiply the terms, and substitute 1 for i2.​

V=(24+12i)(−5i)

=−120i−60i2

=−120i−60(−1)

=60−120i

Thus, the voltage of the capacitor is 60−120i volts.

The voltage of the resistor, inductor, and capacitor are 96+48i volts, −36+72i volts, and 60−120i volts respectively.

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Module 3 Chapter 3 Exercise 3.2 Quadratic Equations Page 132 Problem 16 Answer

The given diagram shows the components in a circuit. The given current I is 24+12i amps.

The question requires to determine the sum of the voltages for the three components, and write what is noticed by the result.

Given that the voltage of the resistor, inductor, and capacitor are 96+48i volts, −36+72i volts, and 60−120i volts respectively, as determined in part B of example 4.

To determine the sum of voltages, add the voltages by grouping the like terms and combining them.

Then, compare the sum to the voltage across the power source and write what is noticed.

Write the sum of the voltages of the three components, group the real and imaginary parts in the sum, and then combine the like terms.

(96+48i)+(−36+72i)+(60−120i)=(96−36+60)+(48i+72i−120i)

=120+0i

=120​

Thus, the sum of the voltages for the three components is 120 volts.

From the diagram, it can be observed that the power source is labelled 120 V.

This means that the voltage across the power source is 120 volts.

Thus, the sum of the voltages for the three components is equal to the voltage across the power source, that is 120 volts.

The sum of the voltages for the three components is 120 volts.

The sum of the voltages for the three components is equal to the voltage across the power source, that is 120 volts.

Page 132 Problem 17 Answer

It is given that a second resistor with impedance equal to 2 ohms is added to the circuit diagram given in example 4. The given current I is 18+6i amps.

The question requires to determine the total impedance, and then determine the voltage of each component of the circuit.

To determine the total impedance and voltage of each component, use the diagram to write the impedance of each component as a complex number.

Then, add the complex numbers to determine the total impedance.

Next, use the impedance and current in the Ohm’s law to determine the required voltage of each component.

From the circuit diagram, it can be observed that the first resistor has the impedance 4 ohms.

Therefore, the impedance of the first resistor can be represented by the complex number 4.

The inductor has the impedance 3 ohms. Therefore, the impedance of the inductor can be represented by the complex number 3i.

The capacitor has the impedance 5 ohms. Therefore, the impedance of the capacitor can be represented by the complex number −5i.

The second resistor has the impedance 2 ohms. Therefore, the impedance of the second resistor can be represented by the complex number 2.

The total impedance of the circuit is equal to the sum of the impedances of the four components.

Write the sum of the impedances of the four components, group the real and imaginary parts in the sum, and then combine the like terms.​

4+3i+(−5i)+2=(4+2)+(3i−5i)

=6−2i

Thus, the total impedance is 6−2i ohms.

Substitute 18+6i for I and 4 for Z in the Ohm’s law V=I⋅Z, and multiply the terms.​

V=(18+6i)(4)

=72+24i

Thus, the voltage of the first resistor is 72+24i volts.

Substitute 18+6i for I and 2 for Z in the Ohm’s law V=I⋅Z, and multiply the terms.​

V=(18+6i)(2)

=36+12i

Thus, the voltage of the second resistor is 36+12i volts.

Substitute 18+6i for I and 3i for Z in the Ohm’s law V=I⋅Z, and multiply the terms, and substitute −1 for i2.

V=(18+6i)(3i)

=54i+18i2

=54i+18(−1)

=−18+54i

Thus, the voltage of the inductor is −18+54i volts.

Substitute 18+6i for I and −5i for Z in the Ohm’s law V=I⋅Z, and multiply the terms, and substitute −1 for i2.

V=(18+6i)(−5i)

=−90i−30i2

=−90i−30(−1)

=30−90i​

Thus, the voltage of the capacitor is 30−90i volts.

The required total impedance is 6−2i ohms.

The voltages of the first resistor, the second resistor, the inductor, and the capacitor are 72+24i volts, 36+12i volts, −18+54i volts, and 30−90i volts respectively.

Hmh Algebra 2 Quadratic Equations Practice Solutions

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Module 3 Chapter 3 Exercise 3.2 Quadratic Equations Page 132 Problem 18 Answer

Take the two arbitrary complex numbers a+bi and c+di.When a+bi and c+di are added, the sum is (a+bi)+(c+di)=(a+c)+(b+d)i, which is a complex number.

The sum (a+c)+(b+d)i is a real number only if the imaginary part (b+d) is equal to 0.

The imaginary part (b+d) is the sum of the imaginary parts of the complex numbers a+bi and c+di.

Therefore, the sum of two complex numbers is a real number only when the sum of their imaginary parts is equal to 0.

The sum (a+c)+(b+d)i is an imaginary number only if the real part (a+c) is equal to 0.

The real part (a+c) is the sum of the real parts of the complex numbers a+bi and c+di.

Therefore, the sum of two complex numbers is an imaginary number only when the sum of their real parts is equal to 0.

The sum of two complex numbers is a real number only when the sum of the imaginary parts of the two complex numbers is equal to 0.

The sum of two complex numbers is an imaginary number only when the sum of the real parts of the two complex numbers is equal to 0.

Page 133 Problem 19 Answer

Consider the two arbitrary binomial linear expressions a+bx and c+dx.

When a+bx and c+dx are multiplied using the distributive property of multiplication, the product is(a+bx)(c+dx)=ac+adx+bcx+bdx2.

Grouping the like terms, the resulting product is (a+bx)(c+dx)=ac+(ad+bc)x+bdx2.

Consider the two arbitrary complex numbers a+bi and c+di.When a+bi and c+di are multiplied using the distributive property of multiplication, the product is (a+bi)(c+di)=ac+adi+bci+bdi2.

Using the value of i2 and simplifying the expression, the resulting expression is (a+bi)(c+di)=ac+(ad+bc)i−bd.

The right-hand side of the equation can be grouped as (ac−bd)+(ad+bc)i, which is a complex number.

It can be observed that in the multiplication of two binomial linear expressions in the same variable, and in the multiplication of two complex numbers, first the distributive property of multiplication is used, and then the like terms are grouped and simplified.

Also, it can be observed that in the multiplication of two complex numbers, the result obtained after using the distributive property of multiplication and grouping the terms can be simplified further using the value i2=−1.

The product of two binomial linear expressions lacks the square of the imaginary unit, that is i2, and thus, it cannot be simplified further.

The similarities between multiplying two complex numbers and multiplying two binomial linear expressions in the same variable are:

Both involve the application of the distributive property of multiplication (a+b)(c+d)=ac+ad+bc+bd

.Both involve grouping and combining the like terms after using the distributive property of multiplication.

The difference between multiplying two complex numbers and multiplying two binomial linear expressions in the same variable is that the result obtained after using the distributive property of multiplication and grouping the terms in the multiplication of two complex numbers can be simplified further using the value i2=−1.

This is not possible when multiplying two binomial linear expressions because their product does not contain the square i2.

Page 133 Exercise 1  Answer

The given binomials are 3+2x and 4−5x.

The question requires to determine the sum of the given binomials, and then explain how the sum can be used to find the sum of the complex numbers 3+2i and 4−5i.

To add the binomials, group the like terms in the sum using parentheses, and then combine the like terms in the expression.

Then, replace the variable x by the imaginary unit i on both sides of the given equation to find the sum of the complex numbers 3+2i and 4−5i.

Write the sum of 3+2x and 4−5x, group the like terms in parentheses, and combine the like terms in the parentheses.

(3+2x)+(4−5x)=(3+4)+(2x+(−5x))

(3+2x)+(4−5x)=(3+4)+(2x−5x)

(3+2x)+(4−5x)=7−3x

Thus, the required sum of the given binomials is (3+2x)+(4−5x)=7−3x.

The sum of the complex numbers 3+2i and 4−5i can be obtained by substituting the variable x by the imaginary unit i in the equation (3+2x)+(4−5x)=7−3x.

Substitute i for x on both sides of (3+2x)+(4−5x)=7−3x.

(3+2i)+(4−5i)=7−3i

Thus, the sum of the complex numbers is (3+2i)+(4−5i)=7−3i.

The required sum of the given binomials is (3+2x)+(4−5x)=7−3x.

The sum of the complex numbers 3+2i and 4−5i can be determined by substituting i

for x on both sides of the equation for the sum of the given binomials, that is in the equation (3+2x)+(4−5x)=7−3x.

The resulting sum of the complex numbers 3+2i and 4−5i is (3+2i)+(4−5i)=7−3i.

Page 133 Exercise 2  Answer

The given number is 5+i, which can be written as the complex number 5+1⋅i.Therefore, the real part of 5+i is 5 and the imaginary part of 5+i is 1.

Since the given number can be written as the complex number 5+1⋅i having nonzero real and imaginary parts, it belongs only to the set of complex numbers.

The real part and imaginary part of 5+i are 5 and 1 respectively.

The given number 5+i belongs to only the set of complex numbers.

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Module 3 Chapter 3 Exercise 3.2 Quadratic Equations Page 133 Exercise 3  Answer

The given number is 7−6i, which can be written as the complex number 7+(−6)i.

Therefore, the real part of 7−6i is 7 and the imaginary part of 7−6i is −6.

Since the given number can be written as the complex number 7+(−6)i having nonzero real and imaginary parts, it belongs only to the set of complex numbers.

The real part and imaginary part of 7−6i are 7 and −6 respectively.

The given number 7−6i belongs to only the set of complex numbers.

Page 134 Exercise 4  Answer

The given number is 25, which can be written as the complex number 25+0i.Therefore, the real part of 25 is 25 and the imaginary part of 25 is 0.

Since the given number can be written as the complex number 25+0i having the imaginary part 0, it belongs to the set of real numbers and the set of complex numbers.

The real part and imaginary part of 25 are 25 and 0 respectively.

The given number 25 belongs to the set of real numbers and the set of complex numbers.

Page 134 Exercise 5  Answer

The given number is i√21, which can be written as the complex number 0+(√21)i

.Therefore, the real part of i√21 is 0 and the imaginary part of i√21 is √21

.Since the given number can be written as the complex number 0+(√21)i

having the real part 0, it belongs to the set of imaginary numbers and the set of complex numbers.

The real part and imaginary part of i√21 are 0 and √21 respectively.

The given number i√21 belongs to the set of imaginary numbers and the set of complex numbers.

Page 134 Exercise 6 Answer

The given sum is (3+4i)+(7+11i).

The question requires to add the complex numbers in the given sum.

To add the complex numbers, group the like terms in the sum using parentheses, and then combine the like terms in the expression.

Group the real and imaginary parts in the sum (3+4i)+(7+11i), and then combine the like terms.​

(3+4i)+(7+11i)=(3+7)+(4i+11i)

=10+15i

Thus, the required sum is 10+15i.

The required sum is 10+15i.

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Module 3 Chapter 3 Exercise 3.2 Quadratic Equations Page 134 Exercise 7 Answer

The given sum is (−1−i)+(−10+3i).

The question requires to add the complex numbers in the given sum.

To add the complex numbers, group the like terms in the sum using parentheses, and then combine the like terms in the expression.

Group the real and imaginary parts in the sum (−1−i)+(−10+3i), and then combine the like terms.​

(−1−i)+(−10+3i)=(−1+(−10))+(−i+3i)

=(−1−10)+(−i+3i)

=−11+2i

Thus, the required sum is −11+2i.

The required sum is −11+2i.

Page 133 Exercise 8 Answer

The given sum is (−9−7i)+(6+5i).

The question requires to add the complex numbers in the given sum.

To add the complex numbers, group the like terms in the sum using parentheses, and then combine the like terms in the expression.

Group the real and imaginary parts in the sum (−9−7i)+(6+5i), and then combine the like terms.​

(−9−7i)+(6+5i)=(−9+6)+(−7i+5i)

=−3−2i

Thus, the required sum is −3−2i.

The required sum is −3−2i.

Page 134 Exercise 9 Answer

The given difference is (2+3i)−(7+6i).

The question requires to subtract the complex numbers in the given difference.

To subtract the complex numbers, rewrite the difference as a sum, group the like terms in the sum using parentheses, and then combine the like terms in the expression.

Rewrite the subtraction of the complex numbers in (2+3i)−(7+6i) as addition.

Then, group the real and imaginary parts, and combine the like terms.​

(2+3i)−(7+6i)=(2+3i)+(−7−6i)

=(2−7)+(3i−6i)

=−5−3i

Thus, the required difference is −5−3i.

The required difference is −5−3i.

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Module 3 Chapter 3 Exercise 3.2 Quadratic Equations Page 134 Exercise 10 Answer

The given difference is (4+5i)−(14−i).

The question requires to subtract the complex numbers in the given difference.

To subtract the complex numbers, rewrite the difference as a sum, group the like terms in the sum using parentheses, and then combine the like terms in the expression.

Rewrite the subtraction of the complex numbers in (4+5i)−(14−i) as addition.

Then, group the real and imaginary parts, and combine the like terms.​

(4+5i)−(14−i)=(4+5i)+(−14+i)

=(4−14)+(5i+i)

=−10+6i

Thus, the required difference is −10+6i.

The required difference is −10+6i.

Page 134 Exercise 11 Answer

The given difference is (−8−3i)−(−9−5i).The question requires to subtract the complex numbers in the given difference.

To subtract the complex numbers, rewrite the difference as a sum, group the like terms in the sum using parentheses, and then combine the like terms in the expression.

Rewrite the subtraction of the complex numbers in (−8−3i)−(−9−5i)

as addition. Then, group the real and imaginary parts, and combine the like terms.​

(−8−3i)−(−9−5i)=(−8−3i)+(9+5i)

=(−8+9)+(−3i+5i)

=1+2i

Thus, the required difference is 1+2i.

The required difference is 1+2i.

Page 134 Exercise 12 Answer

The given difference is (5+2i)−(5−2i).

The question requires to subtract the complex numbers in the given difference.

To subtract the complex numbers, rewrite the difference as a sum, group the like terms in the sum using parentheses, and then combine the like terms in the expression.

Rewrite the subtraction of the complex numbers in (5+2i)−(5−2i) as addition.

Then, group the real and imaginary parts, and combine the like terms.

(5+2i)−(5−2i)=(5+2i)+(−5+2i)

=(5−5)+(2i+2i)

=0+4i

=4i

Thus, the required difference is 4i.

The required difference is 4i.

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Module 3 Chapter 3 Exercise 3.2 Quadratic Equations Page 134 Exercise 13 Answer

The given product is (2+3i)(3+5i).

The question requires to multiply the complex numbers in the given product.

To multiply the complex numbers, use the distributive property of multiplication and the value of i2, and simplify the expression.

Apply the distributive property of multiplication in the given product (2+3i)(3+5i), and then combine the like terms.

​(2+3i)(3+5i)=6+10i+9i+15i2

=6+19i+15i2

Substitute −1 for i2, and then simplify the expression.

(2+3i)(3+5i)=6+19i+15(−1)

=6+19i−15

=−9+19i

Thus, the required product is −9+19i.

The required product is −9+19i.

Page 134 Exercise 14 Answer

The given product is (7+i)(6−9i).

The question requires to multiply the complex numbers in the given product.

To multiply the complex numbers, use the distributive property of multiplication and the value of i2, and simplify the expression.

Apply the distributive property of multiplication in the given product (7+i)(6−9i), and then combine the like terms.

​(7+i)(6−9i)=42−63i+6i−9i2

=42−57i−9i2

Substitute −1 for i2, and then simplify the expression.

​(7+i)(6−9i)=42−57i−9(−1)

=42−57i+9

=51−57i

Thus, the required product is 51−57i.

The required product is 51−57i.

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Module 3 Chapter 3 Exercise 3.2 Quadratic Equations Page 134 Exercise 15 Answer

The given product is (4−i)(4+i).

The question requires to multiply the complex numbers in the given product.

To multiply the complex numbers, use the distributive property of multiplication and the value of i2, and simplify the expression.

Apply the distributive property of multiplication in the given product (4−i)(4+i), and then combine the like terms.

​(4−i)(4+i)=16+4i−4i−i2=16−i2

Substitute −1 for i2, and then simplify the expression.

​(4−i)(4+i)=16−(−1)

=16+1

=17

Thus, the required product is 17.

The required product is 17.

Page 135 Exercise 16 Answer

The given diagram shows the components in a circuit. The given current is 12+36i amps.

The question requires to determine the total impedance, and then determine the voltage for each component of the circuit.

To determine the total impedance and voltage of each component, use the diagram to write the impedance for each component as a complex number.

Then, add the complex numbers to determine the total impedance.

Next, use the impedance and current in the Ohm’s law to determine the required voltage for each component.

From the circuit diagram, it can be observed that there is one resistor and one capacitor.

The resistor has the impedance 1 ohm. Therefore, the impedance for the resistor can be represented by the complex number 1.

The capacitor has the impedance 3 ohms. Therefore, the impedance for the capacitor can be represented by the complex number −3i.

The total impedance for the circuit is equal to the sum of the impedances for the two components.

Calculate the sum of the impedances for the two components.

1+(−3i)=1−3i

Thus, the total impedance is 1−3i ohms.

Substitute 12+36i for I and 1 for Z in the Ohm’s law V=I⋅Z, and multiply the terms.

​V=(12+36i)(1)

=12+36i

Thus, the voltage for the resistor is 12+36i volts.

Substitute 12+36i for I and −3i for Z in the Ohm’s law V=I⋅Z, and multiply the terms, and substitute −1 for i2.

​V=(12+36i)(−3i)

=−36i−108i2

=−36i−108(−1)

=108−36i

​Thus, the voltage for the capacitor is 108−36i volts.

The required total impedance is 1−3i ohms.

The voltages for the resistor and the capacitor are 12+36i volts and 108−36i volts respectively.

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Module 3 Chapter 3 Exercise 3.2 Quadratic Equations Page 135 Exercise 17 Answer

The given diagram shows the components in a circuit. The given current is 19.2−14.4i amps.

The question requires to determine the total impedance, and then determine the voltage for each component of the circuit.

To determine the total impedance and voltage of each component, use the diagram to write the impedance for each component as a complex number.

Then, add the complex numbers to determine the total impedance.

Next, use the impedance and current in the Ohm’s law to determine the required voltage for each component.

From the circuit diagram, it can be observed that there is one resistor and one inductor.

The resistor has the impedance 4 ohms. Therefore, the impedance for the resistor can be represented by the complex number 4.

The inductor has the impedance 3 ohms. Therefore, the impedance for the inductor can be represented by the complex number 3i.

The total impedance for the circuit is equal to the sum of the impedances for the two components.

Write the sum of the impedances for the two components.

(4)+(3i)=4+3i

Thus, the total impedance is 4+3i ohms.

Substitute 19.2−14.4i for I and 4 for Z in the Ohm’s law V=I⋅Z, and multiply the terms.

​V=(19.2−14.4i)(4)

=76.8−57.6i

​Thus, the voltage for the resistor is 76.8−57.6i volts.

Substitute 19.2−14.4i for I and 3i for Z in the Ohm’s law V=I⋅Z, and multiply the terms, and substitute −1 for i2.

V=(19.2−14.4i)(3i)

=57.6i−43.2i2

=57.6i−43.2(−1)

=43.2+57.6i

​Thus, the voltage for the inductor is 43.2+57.6i volts.

The required total impedance is 4+3i ohms.

The voltages for the resistor and the inductor are 76.8−57.6i volts and 43.2+57.6i

volts respectively.

Page 135 Exercise 18 Answer

The given diagram shows the components in a circuit. The given current is 7.2+9.6i amps.

The question requires to determine the total impedance, and then determine the voltage for each component of the circuit.

To determine the total impedance and voltage of each component, use the diagram to write the impedance for each component as a complex number.

Then, add the complex numbers to determine the total impedance.

Next, use the impedance and current in the Ohm’s law to determine the required voltage for each component.

From the circuit diagram, it can be observed that there is one resistor, one inductor, and one capacitor.

The resistor has the impedance 6 ohms. Therefore, the impedance for the resistor can be represented by the complex number 6.

The inductor has the impedance 2 ohms. Therefore, the impedance for the inductor can be represented by the complex number 2i.

The capacitor has the impedance 10 ohms. Therefore, the impedance for the capacitor can be represented by the complex number −10i.

The total impedance for the circuit is equal to the sum of the impedances for the three components.

Calculate the sum of the impedances for the three components.

​6+2i+(−10i)=6+(2i−10i)

=6−8i

Thus, the total impedance is 6−8i ohms.

Substitute 7.2+9.6i for I and 6 for Z in the Ohm’s law V=I⋅Z, and multiply the terms.

V=(7.2+9.6i)(6)

=43.2+57.6i

​Thus, the voltage for the resistor is 43.2+57.6i volts.

Substitute 7.2+9.6i for I and 2i for Z in the Ohm’s law V=I⋅Z, and multiply the terms, and substitute −1 for i2.

​V=(7.2+9.6i)(2i)

=14.4i+19.2i2

=14.4i+19.2(−1)

=−19.2+14.4i

Thus, the voltage for the inductor is −19.2+14.4i volts.

Substitute 7.2+9.6i for I and −10i for Z in the Ohm’s law V=I⋅Z, and multiply the terms, and substitute −1 for i2.

V=(7.2+9.6i)(−10i)

=−72i−96i2

=−72i−96(−1)

=96−72i

​Thus, the voltage for the capacitor is 96−72i volts.

The required total impedance is 6−8i ohms.

The voltages for the resistor, the inductor, and the capacitor are 43.2+57.6i volts, −19.2+14.4i

volts, and 96−72i volts respectively.

Hmh Algebra 2 Chapter 3 Exercise 3.2 Step-By-Step Solutions

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Module 3 Chapter 3 Exercise 3.2 Quadratic Equations Page 135 Exercise 19 Answer

The given diagram shows the components in a circuit. The given current is 16.8+2.4i amps.

The question requires to determine the total impedance, and then determine the voltage for each component of the circuit.

To determine the total impedance and voltage of each component, use the diagram to write the impedance for each component as a complex number.

Then, add the complex numbers to determine the total impedance.

Next, use the impedance and current in the Ohm’s law to determine the required voltage for each component.

From the circuit diagram, it can be observed that there is one resistor, one inductor, and one capacitor.

The resistor has the impedance 7 ohms. Therefore, the impedance for the resistor can be represented by the complex number 7.

The inductor has the impedance 3 ohms. Therefore, the impedance for the inductor can be represented by the complex number 3i.

The capacitor has the impedance 4 ohms. Therefore, the impedance for the capacitor can be represented by the complex number −4i.

The total impedance for the circuit is equal to the sum of the impedances for the three components.

Calculate the sum of the impedances for the three components.

​7+3i+(−4i)=7+(3i−4i)

=7−i

Thus, the total impedance is 7−i ohms.

Substitute 16.8+2.4i for I and 7 for Z in the Ohm’s law V=I⋅Z, and multiply the terms.​

V=(16.8+2.4i)(7)

=117.6+16.8i

Thus, the voltage for the resistor is 117.6+16.8i volts.

Substitute 16.8+2.4i for I and 3i for Z in the Ohm’s law V=I⋅Z, and multiply the terms, and substitute −1 for i2.

​V=(16.8+2.4i)(3i)

=50.4i+7.2i2

=50.4i+7.2(−1)

=−7.2+50.4i

​Thus, the voltage for the inductor is −7.2+50.4i volts.

Substitute 16.8+2.4i for I and −4i for Z in the Ohm’s law V=I⋅Z, and multiply the terms, and substitute −1 for i2.

​V=(16.8+2.4i)(−4i)

=−67.2i−9.6i2

=−67.2i−9.6(−1)

=9.6−67.2i

Thus, the voltage for the capacitor is 9.6−67.2i volts.

The required total impedance is 7−i ohms.

The voltages for the resistor, the inductor, and the capacitor are 117.6+16.8i volts, −7.2+50.4i volts, and 9.6−67.2i volts respectively.

Page 136 Exercise 20 Answer

The given expressions are (A) (3−5i)(3+5i), (B) (3+5i)(3+5i), (C) (−3−5i)(3+5i), and (D) (3−5i)(−3−5i).

The given products are −16+30i, −34, 34, and 16−30i.

The question requires to match the given products on the right with their corresponding expressions on the left.

To match the products with the expressions, simplify the expressions using the distributive property of multiplication and the value of i2.

Then, match the obtained products with the expressions.

Apply the distributive property of multiplication in the product (3−5i)(3+5i), combine the like terms, substitute −1 for i2, and then simplify the expression.

(3−5i)(3+5i)=9+15i−15i−25i2

=9−25i2

=9−25(−1)

=9+25

=34

Thus, the correct match for the product 34 is the expression (A) (3−5i)(3+5i).

Apply the distributive property of multiplication in the product (3+5i)(3+5i), combine the like terms, substitute −1 for i2, and then simplify the expression.​

(3+5i)(3+5i)=9+15i+15i+25i2

=9+30i+25i2

=9+30i+25(−1)

=9+30i−25

=−16+30i

Thus, the correct match for the product −16+30i is the expression (B) (3+5i)(3+5i).

Apply the distributive property of multiplication in the product (−3−5i)(3+5i), combine the like terms, substitute −1 for i2, and then simplify the expression.​

(−3−5i)(3+5i)=−9−15i−15i−25i2

=−9−30i−25i2

=−9−30i−25(−1)

=−9−30i+25

=16−30i

Thus, the correct match for the product 16−30i is the expression (C) (−3−5i)(3+5i).

Apply the distributive property of multiplication in the product (3−5i)(−3−5i), combine the like terms, substitute −1 for i2, and then simplify the expression.​

(3−5i)(−3−5i)=−9−15i+15i+25i2

=−9+25i2

=−9+25(−1)

=−9−25

=−34

Thus, the correct match for the product −34 is the expression (D) (3−5i)(−3−5i).

The correct match for the product −16+30i is the expression (B) (3+5i)(3+5i).

The correct match for the product −34 is the expression (D) (3−5i)(−3−5i).

The correct match for the product 34 is the expression (A) (3−5i)(3+5i).

The correct match for the product 16−30i is the expression (C) (−3−5i)(3+5i).

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Module 3 Chapter 3 Exercise 3.2 Quadratic Equations Page 137 Exercise 21 Answer

The given complex numbers are √3+i√3 and −√3−i√3.

The question requires to prove that √3+i√3 and −√3−i√3 are the square roots of 6i.

To prove the equation, calculate the square of √3+i√3 using the distributive property of multiplication and the value of i2.

Then, use the definition of square root to prove that √3+i√3

is the square root of 6i. Similarly, calculate the square of −√3−i√3 and use the definition of square root to prove that −√3−i√3 is the square root of 6i.

Calculate the square of √3+i√3 using the distributive property of multiplication.

Then, combine the like terms, substitute −1 for i2, and then simplify the expression.

(√3+i√3)2

=(√3+i√3)(√3+i√3)

=3+3i+3i+3i2

=3+6i+3(−1)

=3+6i−3

=6i

According to the definition of square root, if (√3+i√3)2=6i, then the expression √3+i√3 is the square root of 6i.

Hence, it is proved that √3+i√3 is the square root of 6i.

Calculate the square of −√3−i√3 using the distributive property of multiplication.

Then, combine the like terms, substitute −1 for i2, and then simplify the expression.

​(−√3−i√3)2

=(−√3−i√3)(−√3−i√3)

=3+3i+3i+3i2

=3+6i+3(−1)

=3+6i−3 =6i

According to the definition of square root, if (−√3−i√3)2=6i, then the expression −√3−i√3 is the square root of 6i.

Hence, it is proved that −√3−i√3 is the square root of 6i.

It is proved that  √3+i√3 and −√3−i√3 are the square roots of 6i.

Page 137 Exercise 22 Answer

Two complex numbers are given which differ only in the sign of their imaginary parts.

The question requires to determine what type of number is the product of two complex numbers that differ only in the sign of their imaginary parts.

Also, it is required to prove the written conjecture.

To answer the question, take two arbitrary complex numbers that differ only in the sign of their imaginary parts.

Then, write their product as a difference of squares, and use the value of i2 to determine what type of number the product is.

Next, calculate the product of the two complex numbers using the distributive property of multiplication and the value of i2 to prove the conjecture.

Let the two complex numbers be a+bi and a−bi which differ only in the sign of their imaginary parts.

The product of a+bi and a−bi can be written as the difference of squares a2−(bi)2, which can be simplified as a2−b2i     .

The expressions a2 and b2i2 are real because a and b are real, and i2 is equal to −1. This means that the difference of squares a2−(bi)2 is a real number.

Therefore, the product of a+bi and a−bi is a real number.

Thus, the product of two complex numbers that differ only in the sign of their imaginary parts is a real number.

Write the product of a+bi and a−bi, and apply the distributive property of multiplication. Then, combine the like terms, substitute −1 for i2, and then simplify the expression.

​(a+bi)(a−bi)=a2−abi+abi−b2i2

=a2−b2i2

=a2−b2(−1)

=a2+b2

The product a2+b2 is real because a and b are real.

Therefore, the product of the complex numbers a+bi and a−bi is a real number.

Hence, it is proved that the product of two complex numbers that differ only in the sign of their imaginary parts is a real number.

The product of two complex numbers that differ only in the sign of their imaginary parts is a real number.

The conjecture ‘the product of two complex numbers that differ only in the sign of their imaginary parts is a real number’ is proved.

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Module 3 Chapter 3 Exercise 3.2 Quadratic Equations Page 138 Exercise 23 Answer

The given table shows a sequence defined by the recursive rule f(n+1)=(f(n))2+i, where f(0) is equal to 1.

The question requires to generate the first few numbers of the sequence and record the results in the given table.

To determine the few numbers and record the results, substitute 0 for n in the recursive rule, and use the value of f(0) to simplify and obtain the number f(1).

Similarly, substitute n as 1, 2, and 3, and solve the recursive rule using the value of f(n) to find the next three numbers of the sequence.

Finally, record the calculations and results in the given table.

The value of f(0) is equal to 1.

Substitute 0 for n in the recursive rule f(n+1)=(f(n))2+i. Then, substitute 1 for f(0), and simplify the expression.​

f(0+1)=(f(0))2+i

f(1)=(1)2+i

f(1)=1+i​

Substitute 1 for n in the recursive rule f(n+1)=(f(n))2+i. Then, substitute 1+i for f(1), −1 for i2, and simplify the expression.​

f(1+1)=(f(1))2+i

f(2)=(1+i)2+i

f(2)=1+2i+i2+i

f(2)=1+2i+(−1)+i

f(2)=3i​

Substitute 2 for n in the recursive rule f(n+1)=(f(n))2+i. Then, substitute 3i for f(2), −1 for i2, and simplify the expression.​

f(2+1)=(f(2))2+i

f(3)=(3i)2+i

f(3)=9i2+i

f(3)=9(−1)+i

f(3)=−9+i​

Substitute 3 for n in the recursive rule f(n+1)=(f(n))2+i. Then, substitute −9+i for f(3), −1 for i2, and simplify the expression.

f(3+1)=(f(3))2+i

f(4)=(−9+i)2+i

f(4)=81−18i+i2+i

f(4)=81−18i+(−1)+i

f(4)=80−17i​

Record the results by completing the given table using the calculations performed and the num

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 3 Quadratic Equations 23

The first few numbers of the sequence are recorded in the given table as shown:

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 3 Quadratic Equations 23 1

Page 138 Exercise 24 Answer

The given sequence is defined by f(0)=1 and the recursive rule f(n+1)=(f(n))2+i. It is given that if the magnitudes of the numbers increase without bound, the number f(0) equal to 1

does not belong to the “filled-in” Julia set.

The question requires to use the completed table for f(0)=1 to determine whether the number belongs to the “filled-in” Julia set corresponding to c equal to i or not.

Given the completed table for f(0)=1, as calculated in the previous part of this exercise.

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 3 Quadratic Equations 24

To answer the question, write the number f(0)=1 and the next four numbers in the sequence from the table, and calculate their magnitudes.

Then, observe the magnitudes to determine whether the magnitudes increase without bound, and use the observation to determine if the number f(0)=1

belongs to the “filled-in” Julia set corresponding to c equal to i or not.

The value of f(0) is equal to 1, which can be written as the complex number 1+0i.

Calculate the magnitude of f(0) using the formula √a2+b2, and simplify the expression.​

√a2+b2=√12+02

=√1+0

=√1

=±1

The magnitude is equal to 1 because it cannot be negative.

The value of f(1) is equal to 1+i.

Calculate the magnitude of f(1) using the formula √a2+b2, and simplify the expression.

​√a2+b2=√12+12

=√1+1

=√2

The value of f(2) is equal to 3i, which can be written as the complex number 0+3i.

Calculate the magnitude of f(2) using the formula √a2+b2, and simplify the expression.​

√a2+b2=√02+32

=√0+9

=√9

=±3

The magnitude is equal to 3 because it cannot be negative.

The value of f(4) is equal to 80−17i.

Calculate the magnitude of f(4) using the formula √a2+b2, and simplify the expression.

√a2+b2=√802+(−17)2

=√6400+289

=√6689 ≈ ±81.8

The magnitude is equal to 81.8 because it cannot be negative.

From the magnitudes of the first few generated numbers, it can be observed that there is no bound on the value of the magnitudes as n increases.

Since the magnitudes increase without bound, the number f(0)=1 does not belong to the “filled-in” Julia set corresponding to c equal to i.

No, the number f(0)=1 does not belong to the “filled-in” Julia set corresponding to c

equal to i because for the numbers of the sequence determined in the table, the magnitudes increase without bound.

Hmh Algebra 2 Chapter 3 Exercise 3.2 Step-By-Step Solutions

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Module 3 Chapter 3 Exercise 3.2 Quadratic Equations Page 138 Exercise 25 Answer

The given sequence is defined by f(0)=i and the recursive rule f(n+1)=(f(n))2+i.

The question requires to determine whether the number f(0)=i belongs to the “filled-in” Julia set corresponding to c equal to i or not.

To determine the first few numbers of the sequence, substitute 0 for n in the recursive rule, and use the value of f(0) to simplify and obtain the number f(1).

Similarly, substitute n as 1, 2, and 3, and solve the recursive rule using the value of f(n) to find the next three numbers of the sequence.

Finally, record the calculations and results in a table.

To answer the question, calculate the magnitudes of the number f(0)=i and the next four numbers in the sequence from the table.

Then, observe the magnitudes to determine whether the magnitudes increase without bound, and use the observation to determine if the number f(0)=i belongs to the “filled-in” Julia set corresponding to c equal to i or not.

The value of f(0) is equal to i.Substitute 0 for n in the recursive rule f(n+1)=(f(n))2+i.

Then, substitute i for f(0), and −1 for i2.​

f(0+1)=(f(0))2+i

f(1)=(i)2+i

f(1)=i2+i

f(1)=−1+i​

Substitute 1 for n in the recursive rule f(n+1)=(f(n))2+i.

Then, substitute −1+i for f(1), −1 for i2, and simplify the expression.

f(1+1)=(f(1))2+i

f(2)=(−1+i)2+i

f(2)=1−2i+i2+i

f(2)=1−2i+(−1)+i

f(2)=−i​

Substitute 2 for n in the recursive rule f(n+1)=(f(n))2+i.

Then, substitute −i for f(2), and −1 for i2.​

f(2+1)=(f(2))2+i

f(3)=(−i)2+i

f(3)=i2+i

f(3)=−1+i​

Substitute 3 for n in the recursive rule f(n+1)=(f(n))2+i.

Then, substitute −1+i for f(3), −1 for i2, and simplify the expression.

f(3+1)=(f(3))2+i

f(4)=(−1+i)2+i

f(4)=1−2i+i2+i

f(4)=1−2i+(−1)+i

f(4)=−i

Record the results by constructing a table with the columns for values of n, f(n), and f(n+1).

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 3 Quadratic Equations 25

The value of f(0) is equal to i, which can be written as the complex number 0+1⋅i.

Calculate the magnitude of f(0) using the formula √a2+b2, and simplify the expression.​

√a2+b2=√02+12

=√0+1

=√1

=±1

The magnitude is equal to 1 because it cannot be negative.

The value of f(1) is equal to −1+i.

Calculate the magnitude of f(1) using the formula √a2+b2, and simplify the expression.​

√a2+b2=√(−1)2+12

=√1+1

=√2

The value of f(2) is equal to −i, which can be written as the complex number 0+(−1)i.

Calculate the magnitude of f(2) using the formula √a2+b2, and simplify the expression.​

√a2+b2=√02+(−1)2

=√0+1

=√1

=±1​

The magnitude is equal to 1 because it cannot be negative.

The value of f(3) is equal to −1+i.

Calculate the magnitude of f(3) using the formula √a2+b2, and simplify the expression.

​√a2+b2=√(−1)2+12

=√1+1

=√2

The value of f(4) is equal to −i, which can be written as the complex number 0+(−1)i.

Calculate the magnitude of f(4) using the formula √a2+b2, and simplify the expression.

√a2+b2=√02+(−1)2

=√0+1

=√1

=±1

The magnitude is equal to 1 because it cannot be negative.

From the magnitudes of the first few generated numbers, it can be observed that the magnitudes are bounded.

The values of the magnitudes are either 1 or √2. Therefore, the magnitudes are bounded at √2.

Since the magnitudes remain bounded, the number f(0)=i belongs to the “filled-in” Julia set corresponding to c equal to i.

Yes, the number f(0)=i belongs to the “filled-in” Julia set corresponding to c equal to i because the magnitudes for the numbers of the sequence remain bounded at √2.

The values of the magnitudes are either 1 or √2.

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Module 3 Chapter 3 Exercise 3.1 Quadratic Equations

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Module 3 Chapter 3 Exercise 3.1 Quadratic Equations

Page 112 Problem 1 Answer

The given inequality is n−12>9.

The question requires to solve the given inequality.

To solve the inequality, isolate the variable n on one side of the inequality using addition.

Add 12   on both sides of n−12>9.​

n−12+12>9+12n>21

Thus, the solution of n−12>9 is n>21.

The required solution is n>21.

Page 112 Problem 2 Answer

The given inequality is −3p<−27.

The question requires to solve the given inequality.

To solve the inequality, isolate the variable p on one side of the inequality using division.

Divide both sides of −3p<−27 by −3.​

−3p<−27

−3p/−3>−27

−3p>9

Thus, the solution of −3p<−27 is p>9.

The required solution is p>9.

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Module 3 Chapter 3 Exercise 3.1 Quadratic Equations

HMH Algebra 2 Module 3 Chapter 3 Exercise 3.1 Solutions

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Module 3 Chapter 3 Exercise 3.1 Quadratic Equations Page 112 Problem 3 Answer

The given inequality is k/4≥−1.

The question requires to solve the given inequality.

To solve the inequality, isolate the variable k on one side of the inequality using multiplication.

Multiply both sides of k/4 ≥−1 by 4.​

4(k/4)≥4(−1)

k≥−4

Thus, the solution of k/4≥−1 is k≥−4.

Page 112 Problem 4 Answer

The given expression is 16p2/2p4.

The question requires to simplified the given expression.

To simplify the expression, rewrite the numbers in the expression as powers of 2, and use the property of exponents am/an=am−n to simplify the expression.

Rewrite 16 and 2 as powers of 2, and use the property am/an = am−n.​

16p2/2p4=24p2

21/p4=24−1

p4−2

Subtract the exponents and simplify the expression.​

16p2/2p4=23

p2=8

p2 Thus, the required simplified expression is 8p2.

The required simplified form of 16p2

2p4 is 8 p2.

Page 112 Problem 5 Answer

The given expression is 5vw5⋅2v4.

The question requires to simplified the given expression.

To simplify the expression, use the property of exponents am/an=am+n and add the exponents to simplify the expression.

Rewrite the expression, apply the property am/an=am+n, and add the exponents.

5vw5⋅2v4

=5⋅2⋅v1⋅v4⋅w5

=10v1+4/w5

=10v5/w5

Thus, the required simplified expression is 10v5/w5.

The required simplified form of 5vw5⋅2v4 is 10v5/w5.

Page 112 Problem 6 Answer

The given expression is 3x7/y

6x4/y2.

The question requires to simplified the given expression.

To simplify the expression, use the property of exponents am/an=am−n, subtract the exponents, and divide the terms to simplify the expression.

Rewrite the expression, and use the property am/an=am−n.​

3x7/y

6x4/y2=3x7/y1

6x4/y2=3x7−4

6y2−1 Subtract the exponents and divide the terms.​

3x7/y

6x4/y2=3x3

6y1=x3/2y

Thus, the required simplified expression is x3/2y.

The required simplified form of 3x7/y

6x4/y2 is x3/2y.

Quadratic Equations Exercise 3.1 Answers HMH Algebra 2

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Module 3 Chapter 3 Exercise 3.1 Quadratic Equations Page 112 Problem 7 Answer

The given equation is x2−7x+6=0.

The question requires to solve the given equation by factoring it.

To solve the equation, write the pair of factors of the constant, and identify the pair of factors whose sum is equal to the coefficient of the middle term.

Then, factorise the left-hand side of the given quadratic equation, and solve it to obtain the values of x, and thus, obtain the required solutions.

The constant in the given quadratic equation is 6.

Write the pair of factors of the constant 6.

1 and 6

2 and 3

−1 and −6

−2 and −3

It can be observed that the sum of the pair of factors −1 and −6 is equal to the coefficient of the middle term in the given quadratic equation, that is −7.

Therefore, the left-hand side of the given quadratic equation can be factorised as (x−1)(x−6).

Thus, the equation becomes (x−1)(x−6)=0.

The equation (x−1)(x−6)=0 is true only when either x−1 is equal to 0, or x−6 is equal to 0.

When x−1 is equal to 0, the value of x is equal to 1.

When x−6 is equal to 0, the value of x is equal to 6.

Thus, the required solutions are 1 and 6.

The required solutions are 1 and 6.

Page 112 Problem 8 Answer

The given equation is x2−18x+81=0.

The question requires to solve the given equation by factoring it.

To solve the equation, write the pair of factors of the constant, and identify the pair of factors whose sum is equal to the coefficient of the middle term.

Then, factorise the left-hand side of the given quadratic equation, and solve it to obtain the values of x, and thus, obtain the required solution.

The constant in the given quadratic equation is 81.

Write the pair of factors of the constant 81.

1 and 81

3 and 27

9 and 9

−1 and −81

−3 and −27

−9 and −9

It can be observed that the sum of the pair of factors −9 and −9

is equal to the coefficient of the middle term in the given quadratic equation, that is −18.

Therefore, the left-hand side of the given quadratic equation can be factorised as (x−9)(x−9).

Thus, the equation becomes (x−9)(x−9)=0.

The equation is true only when is equal to.

When is equal to, the value of is equal to.

Thus, the required solution is.

The required solution is 9.

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Module 3 Chapter 3 Exercise 3.1 Quadratic Equations Page 113 Problem 9 Answer

The square root of any negative number is an imaginary number.

These numbers are not real numbers, and are of the form bi, where b is a real nonzero number, and i is the imaginary unit equal to √−1.

The quadratic equations of the form x2=−a, where a is positive and real, cannot be solved because the square x2 cannot be negative for any real value of x.

Such a quadratic equation can be solved using imaginary numbers by using the definition of square root to rewrite the equation as x=±√−a, and then rewriting ±√−a as the imaginary solutions ±i√a.

If x is negative real number, then the square root √x is called an imaginary number. Imaginary numbers are the non-real numbers of the form bi, where b is a real nonzero number, and i  is the imaginary unit equal to √−1.

If a quadratic equation is of the form x2=−a, where a is a real positive number, then imaginary numbers can be used to solve the equation by using the definition of square root to rewrite the equation as x=±√−a, and then rewriting ±√−a using the imaginary unit i to obtain the solutions ±i√a.

Page 113 Problem 10 Answer

The given equation is x2=16.

The question requires to solve the given equation by graphing.

To solve the given equation, let the left-side and right-side of the given equation be the function rules for f(x) and g(x) respectively.

Next, assign both functions to Y1 and Y2 in a graphing calculator, graph the functions, and use the intersect feature of the graphing calculator to find the point of intersection of the two functions.

Finally, use the x-coordinate of the intersection points to find the input values where the graphs intersect, and thus obtain the required solutions.

Write two functions for the expressions on either side of the given equation x2=16.​

f(x)=x2

g(x)=16

On a graphing calculator, press the Y= key.

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 3 Quadratic Equations 10

Let Y1=f(x), and assign x2 to Y1.

Let Y2=g(x), and assign 16 to Y2.

Next, set the viewing rectangle to [−10,10] by [−2,18], and press the GRAPH key to obtain the graph of the functions.

From the graph, it can be observed that the graphs of the two functions intersect at the points (−4,16) and (4,16).

The x-coordinates of the points of intersection are −4 and 4.

Therefore, x2=16 when the input value x is equal to either −4 or 4.

Thus, the required solutions are x=4 and x=−4.

The required solutions are x=4 and x=−4.

Page 113 Problem 11 Answer

The given equation is x2=16.

The question requires to solve the given equation by factoring.

To solve the equation, rewrite the equation, and factor it using the algebraic identity x2−y2=(x+y)(x−y).

Then, solve the factored equation using the zero-product property to obtain the values of x, and thus, obtain the required solutions.

Subtract 16 from both sides of x2=16.

x2−16=0

Rewrite the left-hand side expression as a difference of squares, and apply the algebraic identity for the difference of squares x2−y2=(x+y)(x−y).​

x2−16=0

x2−42=0

(x+4)(x−4)=0​

According to the zero-product property, the equation (x+4)(x−4)=0 is true only when either x+4 is equal to 0, or x−4 is equal to 0.

When x+4 is equal to 0, the value of x is equal to −4.

When x−4 is equal to 0, the value of x is equal to 4.

Thus, the required solutions are x=−4 and x=4.

The required solutions are x=−4 and x=4.

Page 113 Problem 12 Answer

The given equation is x2=16.

The question requires to solve the given equation by taking square roots.

To solve the equation, take the square roots of both sides of the given equation, and simplify the expression.

Take the square roots of both sides of x2=16, and then simplify the square roots.

x2=16

x=±√16

x=±4

Thus, the required solutions are x=±4.

The required solutions are x=±4.

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Module 3 Chapter 3 Exercise 3.1 Quadratic Equations Page 114 Problem 13 Answer

The given equation is x2=5.

The question requires to determine which of the three methods should be used to solve the given equation, and then solve the given equation.

To answer the question, explain whether solving the equation by graphing, solving the equation by factoring, or solving the equation by taking square roots is preferred.

Then, using the preferred method, solve the equation and write its solutions.

The method preferred to solve the equation is taking the square roots.

This is because the given equation is a simple quadratic equation of the form x2=a, and thus, taking the square roots is the easiest and fastest method to obtain the required solutions.

Take the square roots of both sides of x2=5.​

x2=5

x=±√5

Thus, the required solutions are x=±√5.

The method preferred to solve the equation is taking the square roots because the given equation is a simple quadratic equation of the form x2=a.

This means that the easiest and fastest method to solve the equation is taking the square roots.

The required solutions are x=±√5.

Page 114 Problem 14 Answer

The given equation is x2=−9.The value of the square root x2

cannot be equal to the negative number −9 for any value of x. This means that the given equation has no solution.

Therefore, the given equation cannot be solved either by graphing, factoring or taking the square roots.

The given equation cannot be solved by any of the three methods because the given equation has no solution.

The left-hand side expression x2 cannot be equal to the right-hand side −9 because the square root cannot be negative.

Page 114 Problem 15 Answer

The given equation is −5x2+9=0.

The question requires to solve the given equation by taking square roots.

To solve the equation, isolate the square x2 on one side of the equation using subtraction and division.

Then, use the definition of square root, apply the quotient property of square roots, and simplify the expression.

Subtract 9 from both sides of −5x2+9=0, and then divide both sides by −5.​

−5x2+9−9=0−9

−5x2=−9

x2=−9/−5

x2=9/5

Use the definition of square root to simplify x2=9/5, apply the quotient property of square roots, and simplify the square root in the numerator.

x=±√9/5

x=±√9/√5

x=±3/√5

Multiply and divide the right-hand side of the equation by √5 to rationalize the denominator.

x=±3/√5⋅√5/√5

x=±3√5/5

Thus, the required solutions are x=±3√5/5.

The required solutions are x=±3√5/5.

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Module 3 Chapter 3 Exercise 3.1 Quadratic Equations Page 115 Problem 16 Answer

The given equation is x2−24=0.

The question requires to solve the given equation by taking square roots.

To solve the equation, isolate the square x2 on one side of the equation using addition.

Then, use the definition of square root, apply the product property of square roots, and simplify the expression.

Add 24 on both sides of x2−24=0, and then use the definition of square root.

​x2−24+24=0+24

x2=24

x=±√24

Rewrite the expression in the square root, apply the product property of square roots, and simplify the square root.​

x=±√4⋅6

x=±√4⋅√6

x=±2√6​

Thus, the required solutions are x=±2√6.

The required solutions are x=±2√6.

Page 115 Problem 17 Answer

The given equation is −4x2+13=0.

The question requires to solve the given equation by taking square roots.

To solve the equation, isolate the square x2 on one side of the equation using subtraction and division.

Then, use the definition of square root, apply the quotient property of square roots, and simplify the expression.

Subtract 13 from both sides of −4x2+13=0, and then divide both sides by −4.​

−4x2+13−13=0−13

−4x2=−13

x2=−13/−4

x2=13/4

Use the definition of square root to simplify x2=13/4, apply the quotient property of square roots, and simplify the square root in the denominator.

x=±√13/4

x=±√13/√4

x=±√13/2

Thus, the required solutions are x=±√13/2.

The required solutions are x=±√13/2.

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Module 3 Chapter 3 Exercise 3.1 Quadratic Equations Page 115 Problem 18 Answer

It is given that a water balloon is dropped from the rooftop of a five-story building, which is 50

feet above the ground. Also, it is given that the third-story window is at 24 feet above the ground.

The question requires to determine the time taken by the water balloon to pass by the third-story window.

It is required to write the equation, solve it, and write the exact and if the answer is irrational, also write the decimal approximation of the answer to the nearest tenth of a second.

To determine the time, write an equation modelling the height of the water balloon using the initial height and the equation h(t)=h0−16t2.

Then, substitute the required height as 24, and solve the equation for t2.

Finally, use the definition of square root, and apply the quotient property to obtain the value of t, and thus, the required time to the nearest tenth.

The given situation can be modelled using the equation h(t)=h0−16t2, where h(t) is the height of the water balloon after t seconds, and h0 is the initial height of the water balloon.

Since the water balloon is dropped from the rooftop, the initial height of the water balloon is h0=50 ft.

The required height of the water balloon is h(t)=24 feet above the ground.

Substitute h0−16t2 for h(t) and then 50 for h0 in h(t)=24.​

h0−16t2=24

50−16t2=24​

Subtract 50 from both sides of 50−16t2=24, and then divide both sides by −16.​

−16t2=−26

t2=−26/−16

t2=26/16​

Use the definition of square root to simplify t2=26/16, apply the quotient property of square roots, and simplify the square root in the denominator.​

t=±√26/16

t=±√26/√16

t=±√26/4

The time taken by the water balloon to reach the required height cannot be negative.

Therefore, t=√26/4.

Thus, the water balloon passes by the third-story window after √26/4 ≈ 1.3 seconds.

The equation modelling the given situation is 50−16t2=24.

The required time in which water balloon passes by the third-story window is √26/4≈1.3 seconds.

Page 117 Problem 19 Answer

It is given that a water balloon is dropped from the rooftop of a five-story building, which is 50 feet above the ground.

Also, it is given that the third-story window is at 24 feet above the ground.

The question requires to determine the time taken by the water balloon to hit the ground.

It is required to write the equation, solve it, and write the exact and if the answer is irrational, also write the decimal approximation of the answer to the nearest tenth of a second.

To determine the time, write an equation modelling the height of the water balloon using the initial height and the equation h(t)=h0−16t2.

Then, substitute the required height as 0 ft, and solve the equation for t2.

Finally, use the definition of square root, and apply the product property and quotient property to obtain the value of t, and thus, the required time to the nearest tenth.

The given situation can be modelled using the equation h(t)=h0−16t2, where h(t)

is the height of the water balloon after t seconds, and h0 is the initial height of the water balloon.

Since the water balloon is dropped from the rooftop, the initial height of the water balloon is h0=50 ft.

When the water balloon hits the ground, the height of the balloon is 0 ft.

Therefore, the required height of the water balloon is h(t)=0 feet above the ground.Substitute h0−16t2 for h(t) and then 50 for h0 in h(t)=0.​

h0−16t2=0

50−16t2=0​

Subtract 50 from both sides of 50−16t2=0, and then divide both sides by −16.​

−16t2=−50

t2=−50/−16

t2=50/16​

Use the definition of square root to simplify t2=50/16, and apply the quotient property of square roots.

Then, apply the product property of square roots in the numerator and simplify the square root in the denominator.​

t=±√50/16

t=±√50/√16

t=±√25⋅√2/4

t=±5√2/4

The time taken by the water balloon to hit the ground cannot be negative.

Therefore, t=5√2/4.

Thus, the water balloon hits the ground in 5√2/4 ≈ 1.8 seconds.

The equation modelling the given situation is 50−16t2=0.

The required time in which water balloon hits the ground is 5√2/4 ≈ 1.8 seconds.

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Module 3 Chapter 3 Exercise 3.1 Quadratic Equations Page 117 Problem 20 Answer

It is given that the function d(t)=8/3t2  models the distance d in feet that an object falls in t seconds on the moon. Also, it is given that a tool is dropped by an astronaut on the moon.

The question requires to determine the time taken by the tool to fall feet.

It is required to write the equation, solve it, and write the exact and if the answer is irrational, also write the decimal approximation of the answer to the nearest tenth of a second.

To determine the time, substitute the distance as 4 ft in the given equation, and solve the equation for t2.

Then, use the definition of square root, and apply the product property and quotient property to obtain the value of t, and thus, the required time to the nearest tenth.

The distance that the tool falls is d(t)=4 feet.Substitute 8/3t2 for d(t) in d(t)=4, and then multiply both sides by 3/8.​

8/3t2=43/8⋅8/3

t2=3/8⋅4

t2=3/2

Use the definition of square root to simplify t2=3/2, and apply the quotient property of square roots.​

t=±√3/2

t=±√3/√2

Multiply and divide the right-hand side of the equation by √2 to rationalize the denominator.

Then, simplify the square root in the denominator, and use the product property of square roots to simplify the numerator.​

t=±√3/√2⋅√2/√2

t=±√3⋅√2/2

t=±√6/2

The time taken by the tool to fall a certain distance cannot be negative.

Therefore, t=√6/2.

Thus, the tool falls 4 feet in √6/2 ≈ 1.2 seconds.

The equation for the given situation is 8/3t2=4.

The required time taken by the tool to fall 4 feet is √6/2 ≈ 1.2 seconds.

Page 117 Problem 21 Answer

The given imaginary number is −i√2.

The question requires to determine the square of the given imaginary number.

To determine the square, square the given imaginary number and use the product property of exponents.

Then, use the value of i2and simplify the expression.

Take the square of −i√2 and use the product property of exponents (ab)m=am⋅bm.

(−i√2)2=(−√2)2⋅i2

Apply the exponent on the base, substitute −1 for i2, and multiply the terms in the expression.​

(−i√2)2

=(2)(−1)

=−2

Thus, the square of −i√2 is −2.

The required square of −i√2 is −2.

Page 118 Problem 22

The square of i is given by the equation −1=i2.Rewriting the left-hand side of the equation as a square, the equation becomes (√−1)2=i2.

Using the definition of square root, the equation can be simplified to √−1=±√i2.

Simplifying the right-hand side of this equation, the equation becomes √−1=±i.

Therefore, the positive square root of −1 is i, and the negative square root of −1 is −i.

Thus, the other square root of −1 is −i.

The other square root of −1 is −i because the equation (√−1)2=i2 can be written as √−1=±√i2

using the definition of square root, which implies that the positive square root of −1 is i, and the negative square root of −1 is −i.

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Module 3 Chapter 3 Exercise 3.1 Quadratic Equations Page 118 Problem 23

The given imaginary number is −2i.

The question requires to determine the square of the given imaginary number.

To determine the square, square the given imaginary number and use the product property of exponents.

Then, use the value of i2 and simplify the expression.

Take the square of −2i and use the product property of exponents (ab)m=am⋅bm.(−2i)2=(−2)2⋅i2

Apply the exponent on the base, substitute −1 for i2, and multiply the terms in the expression.​

(−2i)2=(4)(−1)

=−4

Thus, the square of −2i is −4.

The required square of −2i is −4.

Page 118 Problem 24

The given equation is 4x2+11=6.

The question requires to solve the given equation by taking square roots and allow for imaginary solutions.

To solve the equation, isolate the square x2 on one side of the equation using subtraction and division.

Then, use the definition of square root, apply the quotient property of square roots, simplify the expression, and rewrite it in the form bi.

Subtract 11 from both sides of 4x2+11=6, and then divide both sides by 4.​

4x2+11−11=6−11

4x2=−5

x2=−5/4

Use the definition of square root to simplify x2/=−5/4, apply the quotient property of square roots, rewrite the numerator in the form bi, and simplify the square root in the denominator.​

x=±√−5/4

x=±√−5/√4

x=±√(−1)(5)/2

x=±i√5/2

Thus, the required solutions are x=±i√5/2.

The required solutions are x=±i√5/2

HMH Algebra 2 Chapter 3 Exercise 3.1 Solutions Guide

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Module 3 Chapter 3 Exercise 3.1 Quadratic Equations Page 119 Problem 25

The given equation is −5x2+3=10.

The question requires to solve the given equation by taking square roots and allow for imaginary solutions.

To solve the equation, isolate the square x2 on one side of the equation using subtraction and division.

Then, use the definition of square root, apply the quotient property of square roots, rewrite the numerator in the form bi, and rationalize the denominator.

Subtract 3 from both sides of −5x2+3=10, and then divide both sides by −5.​

−5x2+3−3=10−3

−5x2=7

x2=7/−5

x2=−7/5

Use the definition of square root to simplify x2=−7/5, apply the quotient property of square roots, and rewrite the numerator in the form bi.​

x=±√−7/5

x=±√−7/√5

x=±√(−1)(7)/√5

x=±i√7/√5

Multiply and divide the right-hand side of the equation by √5 to rationalize the denominator.​

x=±i√7/√5⋅√5/√5

x=±i√35/5

Thus, the required solutions are x=±i√35/5.

The required solutions are x=±i√35/5.​

Page 119 Problem 26

The first given equation is 4x2+32=0.The expression x2 is always nonnegative for all real values of x.

This means that 4x2≥0 Therefore, 4x2+32≥32.Therefore, the equation 4x2+32=0 is true only if x2 is negative.

Thus, the solutions of the first given equation 4x2+32=0 are imaginary. The second given equation is 4x2−32=0.

The expression x2 is always nonnegative for all real values of x.

This means that 4x2≥0. Therefore, 4x2−32≥−32. Therefore, the equation 4x2−32=0 is true only if x2 is positive.

Thus, the solutions of the second given equation 4x2−32=0 are real.

It can be observed that the solutions of the first quadratic equation are imaginary, and the solutions of the second quadratic equation are real.

The solutions of the first quadratic equation are imaginary, whereas the solutions of the second quadratic equation are real.

This is because the first equation is true only when x2 is negative, and the second equation is true only when x2 is positive.

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Module 3 Chapter 3 Exercise 3.1 Quadratic Equations Page 119 Problem 27

Assume the imaginary number bi. The square of this number is equal to (bi)2, which can be rewritten as b2/i2 using the product property of exponents.

The expression b2 is always positive because b is a real nonzero number. The expression i2 is the square of √−1.

Therefore, i2 is always equal to the negative number −1.

The product b2/i2 of the positive number b2 and the negative number i2 is always negative.

Thus, the expression (bi)2, that is the square of the imaginary number bi, is always negative.

The square of an imaginary number is always negative.

Page 119 Problem 28    

Assume the negative number −b. Here, b is a real nonzero number.The square of the negative number −b is √−b.

The negative number −b can be written as the product of −1 and the real nonzero number b.

Therefore, the square root √−b can be written as √(−1)(b).

Using the product property of square roots, √(−1)(b) can be written as the product of the real number √b, and the imaginary number √−1.

Therefore, √−b =√−1⋅√b.

Rewriting √−1 as the imaginary unit i, the square root of −b becomes √−b=i√b.

Thus, the square root i√b of the negative number −b is obtained by using the definition of square root, rewriting the negative number as the product of −1 and a real number, and then using the product property of square roots.

To find the square roots of a negative number:

First, use the definition of square root, and rewrite the negative number in the square root as the as the product of −1 and a real number.

Next, use the product property of square roots to rewrite the square root as the product of a real square root, and the square root √−1.

Finally, rewrite the square root √−1 as the imaginary unit i to obtain the required square roots.

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Module 3 Chapter 3 Exercise 3.1 Quadratic Equations Page 120 Exercise 1 Answer

The given equation is x2−2=7.

The question requires to solve the given equation by graphing.

To solve the given equation, let the left-side and right-side of the given equation be the function rules for f(x) and g(x) respectively.

Next, assign both functions to Y1 and Y2 in a graphing calculator, graph the functions, and use the intersect feature of the graphing calculator to find the point of intersection of the two functions.

Finally, use the x-coordinate of the intersection points to find the input values where the graphs intersect, and thus obtain the required solutions.

Write two functions for the expressions on either side of the given equation x2−2=7.​

f(x)=x2−2

g(x)=7

On a graphing calculator, press the Y= key.

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 3 Quadratic Equations e 1

Let Y1=f(x), and assign x2−2 to Y1.

Let Y2=g(x), and assign 7 to Y2.

Next, set the viewing rectangle to [−5,5]

by [−2,8], and press the GRAPH key to obtain the graph of the functions.

From the graph, it can be observed that the graphs of the two functions intersect at the points (−3,7) and (3,7).

The x-coordinates of the two points of intersection of the graphs are −3 and 3.

Therefore, x2−2=7 when the input value x is equal to either −3 or 3.

Thus, the required solutions are x=−3 and x=3.

The required solutions are x=−3 and x=3.

Page 120 Exercise 2 Answer

The given equation is x2−2=7.

The question requires to solve the given equation by factoring.

To solve the equation, rewrite the equation and factor it using the difference of squares x2−y2=(x+y)(x−y).

Then, solve the factored equation using the zero-product property to obtain the values of x, and thus, obtain the required solutions.

Subtract 7 from both sides of x2−2=7.​

x2−2−7=7−7

x2−9=0​

Rewrite the left-hand side expression as a difference of squares, and apply the algebraic identity for the difference of squares x2−y2=(x+y)(x−y).​

x2−9=0

x2−32=0

(x+3)(x−3)=0​

According to the zero-product property, the equation (x+3)(x−3)=0 is true only when either x+3 is equal to 0, or x−3 is equal to 0.

When x+3 is equal to 0, the value of x is equal to −3.

When x−3 is equal to 0, the value of x is equal to 3.

Thus, the required solutions are x=−3 and x=3.

The required solutions are x=−3 and x=3.

How To Solve Quadratic Equations Exercise 3.1 HMH Algebra 2

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Module 3 Chapter 3 Exercise 3.1 Quadratic Equations Page 120 Exercise 3 Answer

The given equation is x2−2=7.

The question requires to solve the given equation by taking square roots.

To solve the equation, isolate the square x2 on one side of the equation using addition.

Then, take the square roots of both sides of the equation, and simplify the expression.

Add 2 on both sides of x2−2=7.​

x2−2+2=7+2

x2=9​

Take the square roots of both sides of x2=9, and then simplify the square roots.​

x2=9

x=±√9

x=±3

Thus, the required solutions are x=±3.

The required solutions are x=±3.

Page 121 Exercise 4 Answer

The given equation is 4x2=24.

The question requires to solve the given equation by taking square roots.

To solve the equation, isolate the square x2 on one side of the equation using division, and use the definition of square root to simplify the expression.

Divide both sides of 4x2=24 by 4, and then use the definition of square root.​

4x2/4=24/4

x2=6

x=±√6

Thus, the required solutions are x=±√6.

The required solutions are x=±√6.

Page 121 Exercise 5 Answer

The given equation is -x2/5+15.

The question requires to solve the given equation by taking square roots.

To solve the equation, isolate the square on one side of the equation using subtraction and multiplication.

Then, use the definition of square root, apply the product property of square roots, and simplify the expression.

The question requires to solve the given equation by taking square roots.

To solve the equation, isolate the square on one side of the equation using subtraction and multiplication.

Then, use the definition of square root, apply the product property of square roots, and simplify the expression.

Subtract 15 from both sides of −x2/5+15=0, and then multiply both sides by −5.​

−x2/5+15−15=0−15

−x2/5=−15

(−5)(−x2/5)=(−5)(−15)

x2=75​

Use the definition of square root to simplify the equation x2=75, rewrite the expression in the square root, apply the product property of square roots, and simplify the square root.

​x=±√75

x=±√25⋅3

x=±√25⋅√3

x=±5√3

Thus, the required solutions are x=±5√3.

The required solutions are x=±5√3.

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Module 3 Chapter 3 Exercise 3.1 Quadratic Equations Page 121 Exercise 6 Answer

The given equation is 2(5−5x2)=5.

The question requires to solve the given equation by taking square roots.

To solve the equation, isolate the square x2 on one side of the equation using the distributive property of multiplication, and then subtraction and division.

Then, use the definition of square root, use the quotient property of square roots, and simplify the expression.

Apply the distributive property of multiplication in the left-hand side of 2(5−5x2)=5. Then, subtract 10 from both sides, and divide both sides by −10.​

10−10x2=5−10x2

=−5−10x2−10

=−5−10x2

=1/2

Use the definition of square root to simplify x2=1/2, apply the quotient property of square roots, and simplify the square root in the numerator.​

x=±√1/2

x=±√1/√2

x=±1/√2

Multiply and divide the right-hand side of the equation by √2 to rationalize the denominator.​

x=±1/√2⋅√2/√2

x=±√2/2

Thus, the required solutions are x=±√2/2.

The required solutions are x=±√2/2.

Page 121 Exercise 7 Answer

The given equation is 3x2−8=12.

The question requires to solve the given equation by taking square roots.

To solve the equation, isolate the square x2 on one side of the equation using the addition and division.

Then, use the definition of square root, use the quotient property and product property of square roots, and simplify the expression.

Add 8 on both sides of 3x2−8=12, and divide both sides by 3.​

3x2−8+8=12+8

3x2=20

3x2/3=20/3

x2=20/3

Use the definition of square root to simplify x2=20/3, and apply the quotient property of square roots.​

x=±√20/3

x=±√20/√3

Rewrite the expression in the numerator, apply the product property of square roots, and simplify the square root.

x=±√4⋅5/√3

x=±√4⋅√5/√3

x=±2√5/√3

Multiply and divide the right-hand side of the equation by √3 to rationalize the denominator.

x=±2√5/√3⋅√3/√3

x=±2√15/3

Thus, the required solutions are x=±2√15/3.

The required solutions are x=±2√15/3.

Page 121 Exercise 8 Answer

It is given that a squirrel drops an acorn from a tree.

The question requires to determine the time taken by the acorn to fall 20 feet.

It is required to write the equation, solve it, and write the exact and if the answer is irrational, also write the decimal approximation of the answer to the nearest tenth of a second.

To determine the time, write an equation modelling the distance that the acorn falls using the equation d(t)=16t2.

Then, substitute the required distance fallen as 20, and solve the equation for t2.

Finally, use the definition of square root, and apply the quotient property to obtain the value of t, and thus, the required time to the nearest tenth.

The given situation can be modelled using the equation d(t)=16t2, where d(t) is the distance that the acorn falls in t seconds.

The distance that the acorn falls is d(t)=20 feet.

Substitute 16t2 for d(t) in d(t)=20.

16t2=20 Divide both sides of 16t2=20 by 16.​

16t2/16=20

16t2=20

16t2=5/4

Use the definition of square root to simplify t2=5/4, apply the quotient property of square roots, and simplify the square root in the denominator.

t=±√5/4

t=±√5/√4

t=±√5/2

The time taken by the acorn to fall a certain distance cannot be negative.

Therefore, t=√5/2.

Thus, the acorn falls 20 feet in √5/2 ≈ 1.1 seconds.

The equation modelling the given situation is 16t2=20.

The required time taken by the acorn to fall 20 feet is √5/2 ≈ 1.1 seconds.

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Module 3 Chapter 3 Exercise 3.1 Quadratic Equations Page 121 Exercise 9 Answer

It is given that a window washer drops a squeegee from 60 feet. Also, it is given that another window washer is working squeegee 20 feet above the ground.

The question requires to determine the time taken by the squeegee to pass by the second window washer.

It is required to write the equation, solve it, and write the exact and if the answer is irrational, also write the decimal approximation of the answer to the nearest tenth of a second.

To determine the time, write an equation modelling the height of the squeegee using the initial height and the equation h(t)=h0−16t2.

Then, substitute the required height as 20, and solve the equation for t2.

Finally, use the definition of square root, and apply the quotient property to obtain the value of t, and thus, the required time to the nearest tenth.

The given situation can be modelled using the equation h(t)=h0−16t2, where h(t) is the height of the squeegee after t seconds, and h0 is the initial height of the squee gee.

Since the squeegee is dropped from 60 feet, the initial height of the squeegee is h0=60 ft.

The required height of the squeegee is h(t)=20 feet above the ground.

Substitute h0−16t2 for h(t) and then 60 for h0 in h(t)=20.

​h0−16t2=20

60−16t2=20​

Subtract 60 from both sides of 60−16t2=20, and then divide both sides by −16.​

−16t2=−40

t2=−40

−16t2=10/4

Use the definition of square root to simplify t2=10/4, apply the quotient property of square roots, and simplify the square root in the denominator.

t=±√10/4

t=±√10/√4

t=±√10/2​

The time taken by the squeegee to pass by the second window washer cannot be negative.

Therefore, t=√10/2.

Thus, the squeegee passes by the second window washer in √10/2≈1.6 seconds.

The equation modelling the given situation is 60−16t2=20.

The required time taken by the squeegee to pass by the second window washer is √10/2≈1.6 seconds.

Page 122 Exercise 10 Answer

The given figure shows the lengths of the sides of a rectangle, which has an area equal to 45 cm2.

The question requires to determine the lengths of the sides of the rectangle, and write the exact answer and the approximate answer to the nearest tenth.

To determine the lengths, use the formula for area, the given dimensions, and the given area to form an equation modelling the given situation.

Then, solve the equation for x2, and use the definition of square root to obtain the value of x.

Finally, use the obtained value in the expressions for the lengths of the sides of the rectangle to determine the exact answer and approximate answer to the nearest tenth.

From the figure, it can be observed that the length and width of the rectangle are equal to 3x cm and x cm respectively.

The area of the rectangle is equal to the product of its length 3x and width x, that is A=(3x)(x).

The given area of the rectangle is A=45 square cm.

Substitute (3x)(x) for A in A=45, and multiply the terms.​

(3x)(x)=45

3x2=45

​Divide both sides of 3x2=45 by 3, and use the definition of square root to simplify the equation.​

3x2/3=45/3

x2=15

x=±√15

The length of the width, that is x, cannot be negative.

Therefore, x=√15.

Write the length of the shorter side of the given rectangle, and simplify the expression to the nearest tenth.​

x=√15≈3.9

Calculate the length of the longer side of the given rectangle, and simplify the expression to the nearest tenth.​

3x=3√15 ≈ 11.6

Thus, the lengths of the sides of the rectangle are √15 ≈ 3.9 cm and 3√15 ≈ 11.6 cm.

The length of the shorter side of the given rectangle is √15 ≈ 3.9 cm, and the length of the longer side of the given rectangle is 3√15 ≈ 11.6  cm.

Page 122 Exercise 11 Answer

The given figure shows the lengths of the sides of a rectangle, which has an area equal to 54 cm2.

The question requires to determine the lengths of the sides of the rectangle, and write the exact answer and the approximate answer to the nearest tenth.

To determine the lengths, use the formula for area, the given dimensions, and the given area to form an equation modelling the given situation.

Then, solve the equation for x2, use the definition of square root, and use the product property of square roots to obtain the value of x.

Finally, use the obtained value in the expressions for the lengths of the sides of the rectangle to determine the exact answer and approximate answer to the nearest tenth.

From the figure, it can be observed that the length and width of the rectangle are equal to 3x cm and x cm respectively.

The area of the rectangle is equal to the product of its length 3x and width x, that is A=(3x)(x).

The given area of the rectangle is A=54 square cm.Substitute (3x)(x) for A in A=54, and multiply the terms.​

(3x)(x)=54

3x2=54​

Divide both sides of 3x2=54 by 3, and use the definition of square root to simplify the equation.​

3x2/3=54/3

x2=18

x=±√18

Rewrite the expression in the square root, apply the product property of square roots, and simplify the square root.​

x=±√9⋅2

x=±√9⋅√2

x=±3√2

The length of the width, that is x, cannot be negative.

Therefore, x=3√2.

Write the length of the shorter side of the given rectangle, and simplify the expression to the nearest tenth.​

x=3√2 ≈ 4.2

Calculate the length of the longer side of the given rectangle, and simplify the expression to the nearest tenth.​

3x=3⋅3√2

=9√2 ≈ 12.7

Thus, the lengths of the sides of the rectangle are 3√2 ≈ 4.2 cm and 9√2 ≈ 12.7 cm.

The length of the shorter side of the given rectangle is 3√2 ≈4.2 cm, and the length of the longer side of the given rectangle is 9√2 ≈ 12.7 cm.

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 Exercise 3.1 Walkthrough

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Module 3 Chapter 3 Exercise 3.1 Quadratic Equations Page 122 Exercise 12 Answer

The given imaginary number is 3i.

The question requires to determine the square of the given imaginary number.

To determine the square, square the given imaginary number and use the product property of exponents.

Then, use the value of i2 and simplify the expression.

Take the square of 3i and use the product property of exponents (ab)m=am⋅bm.

(3i)2=(3)2⋅i2

Apply the exponent on the base, substitute −1 for i2, and multiply the terms in the expression.​

(3i)2=(9)(−1)

=−9

Thus, the square of 3i is −9.

The required square of 3i is −9.

Page 122 Exercise 13 Answer

The given imaginary number is i√5.

The question requires to determine the square of the given imaginary number.

To determine the square, square the given imaginary number and use the product property of exponents.

Then, use the value of i2 and simplify the expression.

Take the square of i√5 and use the product property of exponents (ab)m=am⋅bm.

(i√5)2=(√5)2⋅i2

Apply the exponent on the base, substitute −1 for i2, and multiply the terms in the expression.​

(i√5)2

=(5)(−1)

=−5

Thus, the square of i√5 is −5.

The required square of i√5 is −5. 

Page 122 Exercise 14 Answer

The given imaginary number is −i√2/2.

The question requires to determine the square of the given imaginary number.

To determine the square, square the given imaginary number and use the product property of exponents.

Then, use the value of i2 and simplify the expression.

Take the square of −i√2/2 and use the product property of exponents

(ab)m=am⋅bm.(−i√2/2)2=(−√2/2)2⋅i2

Apply the exponent on the base, substitute −1 for i2, and simplify the expression.

(−i√2/2)2=(2/4)(−1)=−2

4=−1/2

Thus, the square of −i√2/2 is −1/2.

The required square of −i√2/2 is −1/2.

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Module 3 Chapter 3 Exercise 3.1 Quadratic Equations Page 122 Exercise 15 Answer

The given equation is 1/2x2+12=4.

The question requires to determine whether the given equation as real solutions or imaginary solutions by solving it.

To answer the question, isolate the square x2 on one side of the equation using subtraction and multiplication.

Then, use the definition of square root, apply the product property of square roots, and rewrite the expression.

Finally, observe the solutions to determine whether they are real or imaginary.

Subtract 12 from both sides of 1/2x2+12=4, and then multiply both sides by 2.​

1/2x2+12−12=4−12

1/2x2=−8x2=−16​

Use the definition of square root to simplify x2=−16, rewrite the expression, apply the product property of square roots, and simplify the expression.​

x=±√−16

x=±√(16)(−1)

x=±√16⋅√−1

x=±4i

Therefore, the solutions are x=±4i.

The solutions include the imaginary unit i.

Thus, the given quadratic equation has imaginary solutions.

The given quadratic equation has imaginary solutions. The solutions are x=±4i.

Page 122 Exercise 16 Answer

The given equation is 5(2x2−3)=4(x2−10).

The question requires to determine whether the given equation as real solutions or imaginary solutions by solving it.

To answer the question, isolate the square x2 on one side of the equation using the distributive property of multiplication, and the operations of addition, subtraction, and division.

Then, use the definition of square root, apply the quotient property of square roots, and rewrite the expression.

Finally, observe the solutions to determine whether they are real or imaginary.

Apply the distributive property of multiplication in 5(2x2−3)=4(x2−10). Then, subtract 4x2 from both sides, add 15 on both sides, and divide both sides by 6.​

10x2−15=4x2−40

6x2−15=−40

6x2=−25

x2=−25/6

Use the definition of square root to simplify x2=−25/6, apply the quotient property of square roots, and rewrite the numerator in the form bi.

x=±√−25/6

x=±√−25/√6

x=±√(25)(−1)/√6

x=±5i/√6

Multiply and divide the right-hand side of the equation by √6 to rationalize the denominator.​

x=±5i/√6⋅√6/√6

x=±5i√6/6

Therefore, the solutions are x=±5i√6/6.

The solutions include the imaginary unit i.

Thus, the given quadratic equation has imaginary solutions.

The given quadratic equation has imaginary solutions. The solutions are x=±5i√6/6. 

Page 123 Exercise 17 Answer

The given equation is x2=−81.

The question requires to solve the given equation by taking square roots and allow for imaginary solutions.

To solve the equation, use the definition of square root, apply the product property of square roots, rewrite the expression in the form bi.

Use the definition of square root to simplify x2=−81, rewrite the expression, apply the product property of square roots, and simplify the expression.​

x=±√−81

x=±√(81)(−1)

x=±√81⋅√−1

x=±9i​

Thus, the required solutions are x=±9i.

The required solutions are x=±9i.

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Module 3 Chapter 3 Exercise 3.1 Quadratic Equations Page 123 Exercise 18 Answer

The given equation is x2+64=0.

The question requires to solve the given equation by taking square roots and allow for imaginary solutions.

To solve the equation, isolate the square x2 on one side of the equation using subtraction.

Then, use the definition of square root, apply the product property of square roots, rewrite the expression in the form bi.

Subtract 64 from both sides of x2+64=0 , and use the definition of square root to simplify the equation.

x2=−64

x=±√−64

Rewrite the expression in the square root, apply the product property of square roots, and simplify the expression.​

x=±√(64)(−1)

x=±√64⋅√−1

x=±8i

Thus, the required solutions are x=±8i.

The required solutions are x=±8i.

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Module 3 Chapter 3 Exercise 3.1 Quadratic Equations Page 123 Exercise 19 Answer

The given equation is 5x2−4=−8.

The question requires to solve the given equation by taking square roots and allow for imaginary solutions.

To solve the equation, isolate the square x2 on one side of the equation using addition and division.

Then, use the definition of square root, apply the quotient property of square roots, simplify the expression, and rewrite it using the imaginary unit i.

Add 4 on both sides of 5x2−4=−8, and then divide both sides by 5.​

5x2−4+4=−8+4

5x2=−4

x2=−4/5

Use the definition of square root to simplify x2=−4/5, apply the quotient property of square roots, and rewrite the numerator in the form bi.

x=±√−4/5

x=±√−4/√5

x=±√(4)(−1)/√5

x=±2i/√5

Multiply and divide the right-hand side of the equation by √5 to rationalize the denominator.​

x=±2i/√5⋅√5/√5

x=±2i√5/5

Thus, the required solutions are x=±2i√5/5.

The required solutions are x=±2i√5/5.

Page 123 Exercise 20 Answer

The given equation is 7×2+10=0.

The question requires to solve the given equation by taking square roots and allow for imaginary solutions.

To solve the equation, isolate the square x2 on one side of the equation using subtraction and division.

Then, use the definition of square root, apply the quotient property of square roots, simplify the expression, and rewrite it using the imaginary unit i.

Subtract 10 from both sides of 7x2+10=0, and then divide both sides by 7.​

7x2+10−10=0−10

7x2=−10

x2=−10/7

Use the definition of square root to simplify x2=−10/7, apply the quotient property of square roots, and rewrite the numerator in the form bi.

x=±√−10/7

x=±√−10/√7

x=±√(10)(−1)/√7

x=±i√10/√7

Multiply and divide the right-hand side of the equation by √7 to rationalize the denominator.

x=±i√10/√7⋅√7/√7

x=±i√70/7

Thus, the required solutions are x=±i√70/7.

The required solutions are x=±i√70/7.

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Module 3 Chapter 3 Exercise 3.1 Quadratic Equations Page 123 Exercise 21 Answer

The given figures show the lengths of the sides of two squares. It is given that the area of the larger square is 42 cm2 greater than the area of the smaller square.

The question requires to determine the lengths of the sides of the squares, and write the exact answer and the approximate answer to the nearest tenth.

To determine the lengths, use the formula for area and the given dimensions to write the areas of the squares.

Then, use the given information and the expression for the areas to form an equation modelling the given situation.

Then, solve the equation for x2, and use the definition of square root to obtain the value of x.

Finally, use the obtained value in the expressions for the lengths of the sides of the two squares to determine the exact answer and approximate answer to the nearest tenth.

From the figure, it can be observed that the length of the side of the larger and smaller square are 2x cm and x cm respectively.

Therefore, the areas of the larger square and smaller square are (2x)2 sq. cm and (x)2 sq. cm respectively.

The area of the larger square, that is (2x)2, is 42 cm2 more than the area of the smaller square, that is (x)2.

Therefore, (2x)2=42+(x)2.

Simplify the equation (2x)2=42+(x)2, and subtract x2 from both sides.

(2x)2=42+(x)2

4x2=42+x2

3x2=42​

Divide both sides of 3x2=42 by 3, and use the definition of square root to simplify the equation.​

3x2/3=42

3x2=14

x=±√14

The length of the side of the smaller square, that is x, cannot be negative.

Therefore, x=√14.

Write the length of the side of the smaller square, and simplify the expression to the nearest tenth.

x=√14 ≈ 3.7

Calculate the length of the side of the larger square, and simplify the expression to the nearest tenth.​

2x=2√14≈7.5

Thus, the lengths of the sides of the smaller square and larger square are √14≈3.7 cm and 2√14≈7.5 cm respectively.

The length of the side of the smaller square is √14≈3.7 cm, and the length of the side of the larger square is 2√14≈7.5 cm.

Page 123 Exercise 22 Answer

The given figures show the lengths of the sides of two squares.

It is given that when the area of the larger square is decreased by 28 cm2, the resulting area is equal to half the area of the smaller square.

The question requires to determine the lengths of the sides of the squares, and write the exact answer and the approximate answer to the nearest tenth.

To determine the lengths, use the formula for area and the given dimensions to write the areas of the squares.

Then, use the given information and the expression for the areas to form an equation modelling the given situation.

Then, solve the equation for x2, use the definition of square root, and then the product property of square roots to obtain the value of x.

Finally, use the obtained value in the expressions for the lengths of the sides of the two squares to determine the exact answer and approximate answer to the nearest tenth.

From the figure, it can be observed that the length of the side of the larger and smaller square are 2x cm and x cm respectively.

Therefore, the areas of the larger square and smaller square are (2x)2 sq. cm and (x)2 sq. cm respectively.

When the area of the larger square is decreased by 28 cm2, the resulting area is (2x)2−28.

The half of the area of the smaller square is 1/2(x)2.

The area (2x)2−28 is equal to half the area of the smaller square, that is 1/2(x)2.

Therefore, (2x)2−28=1/2(x)2.

Simplify the equation (2x)2−28=1/2(x)2, subtract 1/2x2 from both sides, and add 1/2x2 on both sides.​

4x2−28=1/2x2

4x2−1/2x2−28=0

7/2x2−28=0

7/2x2=28​

Multiply both sides of 7/2x2=28 by 2/7, and use the definition of square root to simplify the equation.​

2/7⋅7/2x2=2/7⋅28x2=8

x=±√8

Rewrite the expression in the square root, use the product property of square roots, and simplify the square root.​

x=±√4⋅2

x=±√4⋅√2

x=±2√2

The length of the side of the smaller square, that is x, cannot be negative.

Therefore, x=2√2.

Write the length of the side of the smaller square, and simplify the expression to the nearest tenth.​

x=2√2≈2.8

Calculate the length of the side of the larger square, and simplify the expression to the nearest tenth.​

2x=2⋅2√2

=4√2 ≈ 5.7

Thus, the lengths of the sides of the smaller square and larger square are 2√2 ≈ 2.8 cm and 4√2 ≈ 5.7 cm respectively.

The length of the side of the smaller square is 2√2 ≈ 2.8  cm, and the length of the side of the larger square is 4√2≈5.7 cm.

Exercise 3.1 Quadratic Equations Worked Examples HMHAlgebra 2

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Module 3 Chapter 3 Exercise 3.1 Quadratic Equations Page 124 Exercise 23 Answer

It is given that the height of the ball can be modelled using the equation h(t)=h0−16t2, where h is the height of the ball after t seconds as it falls.

Also, it is given that the ball reaches the maximum height 67 feet, and is caught by an outfielder when it is 3 feet above the ground.

The question requires to determine the time in which the outfielder catches the ball after the ball starts descending.

To determine the time, write an equation modelling the height of the ball using the initial height and the equation h(t)=h0−16t2 .

Then, substitute the required height as 3, and solve the equation for t2.

Finally, use the definition of square root to obtain the value of t, and thus, the required time.

The given situation can be modelled using the equation h(t)=h0−16t2, where h(t) is the height of the ball after t seconds, and h0 is the initial height of the ball.

Since the ball reaches the maximum height 67 feet, the initial height of the ball as it falls is h0=67 ft.

The height of the ball when it is caught is h(t)=3 feet above the ground.Substitute h0−16t2 for h(t) and then 67 for h0 in h(t)=3.

h0−16t2=3

67−16t2=3

Subtract 67 from both sides of 67−16t2=3, and then divide both sides by −16.​

−16t2=−64

t2=−64

−16t2=4​

Use the definition of square root to simplify t2=4, and then simplify the square root.​

t=±√4

t=±2

The time in which the outfielder catches the ball after the ball starts descending cannot be negative.

Therefore, t=2.

Thus, the outfielder catches the ball 2 seconds after the ball starts to descend.

The outfielder catches the ball 2 seconds after the ball starts to descend.

Page 124 Exercise 24 Answer

The outfielder catches the ball 2 seconds after the ball starts to descend, as calculated in the previous exercise.

This means that the ball descends from the maximum height 67 feet to 3 feet in 2 seconds.

Therefore, the time taken by the ball to hit the ground, after it starts descending, will also be approximately equal to 2 seconds.

Assume that the time taken by the ball to reach the maximum height is equal to the time taken by the ball to hit the ground from its maximum height.

Therefore, the time taken by the ball to reach the maximum height will be approximately equal to 2 seconds.

The total time for which the ball was in the air is equal to the time taken by it to reach the maximum height, and the time taken by it to descend from the maximum height 67 feet to 3

feet.

Thus, the total time is equal to approximately 2+2, that is about 4 seconds.

The total time is equal to approximately 2+2, that is about 4 seconds.

This is because the total time is equal to the time taken by it to reach the maximum height, and the time taken by it to descend from the maximum height 67 feet to 3 feet.

It is assumed that the time taken by the ball to reach the maximum height is equal to the time taken by the ball to hit the ground from its maximum height, which is approximately 2 seconds.

Page 125 Exercise 25 Answer

It is given that the aspect ratio of the images is the ratio of the image width to its height, and the aspect ratio of the images on the given HDTV screen is 16:9.

Also, it is given that the area of the HDTV screen is equal to 864 square inches.

The question requires to determine the dimensions of the screen.

To determine the dimensions, use the given aspect ratio to form expressions for the image width and image height.

Then, use the formula for area, the expressions for the dimensions, and the given area to form an equation modelling the area.

Then, solve the equation for x2, and use the definition of square root to obtain the value of x.

Finally, use the obtained value in the expressions for the image width and image height to determine the exact and approximate dimensions of the screen.

The given aspect ratio of the images on the given HDTV screen is 16:9.

This means that the ratio of the image width to the image height on the given HDTV screen is 16:9.

Let the image width and image height be equal to 16x and 9x respectively.

The area of the HDTV screen is equal to the product of the image width 16x and the image height 9x, that is A=(16x)(9x).

The given area of the rectangle is A=864 square inches.

Substitute (16x)(9x) for A in A=864, and multiply the terms.​

(16x)(9x)=864

144x2=864

​Divide both sides of 144x2=864 by 144, and use the definition of square root to simplify the equation.​

144x2

144=864

144x2=6

x=±√6

If the variable x is negative, then the image width 16x and the image height 9x are negative, which is not possible.

Therefore, x=√6.

Calculate the image width of the HDTV screen, and simplify the expression to the nearest hundredth.​

16x=16√6≈39.19

Calculate the image height of the HDTV screen, and simplify the expression to the nearest hundredth.​

9x=9√6≈22.05

Thus, the width and height of the HDTV screen are 16√6≈39.19 inches and 9√6≈22.05 inches respectively.

The width of the HDTV screen is 16√6≈39.19 inches, and the height of the HDTV screen is 9√6 ≈ 22.05 inches.

Page 126 Exercise 26 Answer

It is given that a suspension bridge has two parabolic cables connected between the towers, and vertical cables are suspended from the parabolic cables.

The given table shows the displacements of three vertical cables from the shortest cable, and the height of those cables.

The question requires to determine the quadratic function for the height of the parabolic cable above the road as a function of the displacement from the lowest point of the cable.

Then, it is required to determine the distance between the towers if the maximum height of the parabolic cable is 48 m above the road.

To determine the model, let the equation be h(x)=ax2+bx+c.

Then, use the first row data from the given table to obtain the value of c.

Next, use the data from the second and third rows to form two equations, and solve them to determine the values of the remaining constants.

Finally, use the constants in the assumed equation to determine the required equation.

To determine the distance between the towers, substitute the height as 48

m in the quadratic equation, and use the definition of square root to obtain the value of x.

Then, use the value to find the horizontal displacement of the parabolic cable from the left tower to its lowest position, and the horizontal displacement of the parabolic cable from the right tower to its lowest position.

Finally, a Let the required equation be h(x)=ax2+bx+c, where h(x) is the height of the parabolic cable when the horizontal displacement from the lowest point is x m.

The lowest point of the parabolic cable is the point at which the shortest vertical cable is suspended.

Also, the height of the parabolic cable above the ground is equal to the height of the vertical cable suspended at that point.

When the displacement of a vertical cable from the shortest vertical cable is 0 m, the height of the vertical cable is 3 m.

This means that when the horizontal displacement of the parabolic cable from its lowest point is 0 m, the height of the parabolic cable above the ground is 3 m.

Substitute 0 for x and 3 for h(x) in h(x)=ax2+bx+c, and simplify the expression.​

3=a(0)2+b(0)+c

3=a(0)+b(0)+c

3=0+0+c

3=c​

When the displacement of a vertical cable from the shortest vertical cable is 1 m, the height of the vertical cable is 3.05 m.

This means that when the horizontal displacement of the parabolic cable from its lowest point is 0 m, the height of the parabolic cable above the ground is 3.05 m.

Substitute 1 for x, 3.05 for h(x), and 3 for c in h(x)=ax2+bx+c, simplify the expression, and subtract 3 from both sides.

3.05=a(1)2+b(1)+3

3.05=a(1)+b(1)+3/0.05=a+b…………………(1)​

When the displacement of a vertical cable from the shortest vertical cable is 2 m, the height of the vertical cable is 3.2 m.

This means that when the horizontal displacement of the parabolic cable from its lowest point is 2 m, the height of the parabolic cable above the ground is 3.2 m.

Substitute 2 for x, 3.2 for h(x), and 3 for c in h(x)=ax2+bx+c, simplify the expression, and subtract 3 from both sides.​

3.2=a(2)2

+b(2)+3

3.2=a(4)+b(2)+3

0.2=4a+2b…………………(2)​

Equation (1) can be rewritten as a=0.05−b.

Substitute 0.05−b for a in equation (2), multiply the terms, and solve the equation for b.​

0.2=4(0.05−b)+2b

0.2=0.2−4b+2b

0.2=0.2−2b

0=−2b

0=b​

Substitute 0 for b in equation (1).​

0.05=a+0

0.05=a​

Thus, the equation h(x)=ax2+bx+c becomes:​

h(x)=0.05x2+0x+3

h(x)=0.05x2+3

Thus, the equation modelling the height of the parabolic cable is h(x)=0.05×2+3.

Let the height of the parabolic cable be equal to its maximum height 48. Therefore, h(x)=48.

Substitute 0.05x2+3 for h(x) in h(x)=48, subtract 3 from both sides, and divide both sides by 0.05.

Then, use the definition of square root, and simplify the square root.

0.05x2+3=48

0.05x2=45

x2=900

x=±√900

x=±30

The horizontal displacement of the parabolic cable from its lowest point, that is x, cannot be negative.

Therefore, x=30.

The displacement of the parabolic cable from its lowest point is equal to 30 m when the cable is at the maximum height.

This means that at the point where the parabolic cable connects to the left tower, that is at its maximum height on the left side, the horizontal displacement of the parabolic cable from the shortest vertical cable is 30 m.

Similarly, at the point where the parabolic cable connects to the right tower, that is at its maximum height on the right side, the horizontal displacement of the parabolic cable from the shortest vertical cable is 30 m.

The distance between the towers is equal to the sum of the horizontal displacement of the parabolic cable from the left tower to its lowest position, and the horizontal displacement of the parabolic cable from the right tower to its lowest position.

Thus, the distance between the towers is equal to 30+30=60 m.

The quadratic equation modelling the height of the parabolic cable is h(x)=0.05x2+3, where h(x)  is the height of the parabolic cable when the horizontal displacement from the lowest point is x m.

The distance between the towers is equal to 30+30=60 m.

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Module 5 Chapter 5 Exercise 5.2 Polynomial Functions

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Module 5 Chapter 5 Polynomial Functions

Page 249 Problem 1 Answer

It is given a polynomial in intercept form. It is required to explain that how do you sketch the graph of a polynomial in intercept form.

To sketch a graph of a polynomial, find the intercept then check the symmetry.

Use the multiplicities of the zeros to determine the behaviour of the polynomial at the $x$ intercepts.Determine the end behaviour by examining the leading term.

Use the behaviour and the behaviour at the intercept to sketch the graph.

The explanation to sketch the graph of a polynomial in intercept form is to find the intercept then check the symmetry.

Use the multiplicities of the zeros to determine the behaviour of the polynomial at the $x$ intercepts.

Determine the end behaviour by examining the leading term . Use the behaviour and the behaviour at the intercept to sketch the graph.

Page 249 Problem 2 Answer

The following functions are given, f(x)=x,

f(x)=x2,

f(x)=x3,

f(x)=x4 ,

f(x)=x5, and

f(x)=x6.

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Module 5 Chapter 5 Exercise 5.2 Polynomial Functions

It is required to draw the graph of each function to determine the domain, range and end behavior of the functions.

To find the required answer draw the graph using the graphing calculator and analyze it to determine domain, range and end behavior and make a table.

Graph all the functions using a graphing calculator.

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 5 Polynomial Functions 2

Observe the graph and complete the table filling the domain, rang and end behavior of the given functions.

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 5 Polynomial Functions 2 1

The graph of all the function is given below.

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 5 Polynomial Functions 2 2

The complete table is as follows.

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 5 Polynomial Functions 2 3

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 Module 5 Chapter 5 Exercise 5.2 Solutions

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Module 5 Chapter 5 Exercise 5.2 Polynomial Functions Page 249 Problem 3 Answer

The following functions are given, f(x)=−x,

f(x)=−x2,

f(x)=−x3 ,

f(x)=−x4 ,

f(x)=−x5and

f(x)=−x6 .

It is required to draw the graph of each function to determine the domain, range, and end behavior of the functions.

To find the required answer draw the graph using the graphing calculator and analyze it to determine domain, range, and end behavior and make a table.

Graph all the functions using a graphing calculator.

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 5 Polynomial Functions 3

Observe the graph and complete the table filling the domain, rang, and end behavior of the given functions.

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 5 Polynomial Functions 3 1

The graph of the functions is as follows.

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 5 Polynomial Functions 3 2

The complete table is as follow.

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 5 Polynomial Functions 3 3

Page 250 Problem 4 Answer

It is given that two functions,f(x)=xn, f(x)=−xn  where n is positive whole number.

It is required to generalize the result of this explore between these two given functions.

To generalize the result, substitute n with some positive whole number for both the function then analyse the result to get the general relation between them.

For the function f(x)=xn.

Substitute n with some positive whole number.

For n=1,

​f(x)=x1

​​​​​​​​​​​=x

For n=2,

f(x)=x2

For n=3

f(x)=x3

For the function f(x)=−xn.

Substitute n with some positive whole number.

For n=1,

​f(x)=−x1

​​​​​​​​​​=−x​

For n=2,

f(x)=−x2

For n=3,

f(x)=−x3

Now, compare the obtained result of both the function’s for n=1,2,3.

The relation between f(x)=xn and

f(x)=−xn is

f(x)=−f(x).

The generalize result of this explore between these two given function f(x)=−xn and f(x)=−f(x) is f(x)=−f(x).

Page 252 Problem 5 Answer

It is required to determine whether the graph of a polynomial function in intercept form crosses the x-axis or is tangent to it at an x−intercept.

The graph of p(x)=a(x−x1)(x−x2)…(x−xn) has x1,x2,…, and  xn as its x-intercepts.

Hence, it is called intercept form.In equation p(x)=a(x−x1)(x−x2)…(x−xn) if x1,x2,…, and  xn has non zero value imply function will cross x- axis, but if variable is 0, then this implies that the point is tangent to it at an x- intercept.

From equation p(x)=a(x−x1)(x−x2)…(x−xn) it can be determined whether the graph of a polynomial function in intercept form crosses the x- axis or is tangent to it at an x- intercept.

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Module 5 Chapter 5 Exercise 5.2 Polynomial Functions Page 252 Problem 6 Answer

It is required to find how the graph of the function changes when a factor of−1 is introduced.Consider the function f(x)=x4.

When a factor of−1 is introduced, it becomes f(x)=−x4.

Plot the graph f(x)=−x4, further observe the graph.

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 5 Polynomial Functions 6

It can be observed that there is one distinct factor which is 0.

Further, there are no x- intercepts, as graph turn at point (0,0).

So, the graph is tangent to x- axis at x- intercepts: (0,0) and has only one turning point.

There is one global maximum value at(0,0) and global minimum none.

Therefore, the graph becomes a reflection of the its positive function.

When a factor of −1 is introduced in any function, the graph of the new function is symmetric to the previous one. Also, it is symmetric. The attributes remain the same.

Page 253 Problem 7 Answer

It is given equation f(x)=−(x−4)(x−1)(x+1)(x+2)

It is required to sketch the graph of the polynomial function.

First identify the end behavior of the graph. Then, find its x-intercepts. Now, identify the nature of the graph and draw the graph.

Identify the end behavior of the function,  f(x)=−(x−4)(x−1)(x+1)(x+2).

As x tends to +∞, then f(x) tends to −∞.

As x tends to −∞, then f(x) tends to −∞.

Identify the x- intercept of graph. Then, use the sign of  f(x) on the intervals determined by the x- intercept to find where the graph is above the x- axis and where It’s below the x- axis.

The x- intercept are,x=4,x=1,x=−1, and x=−2.

Tabulate the data and find the nature of f(x) according to each term.

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 5 Polynomial Functions 7

Plot the graph.

The graph of f(x) is above the x- axis on the intervals −2<x<−1 and 1<x<4.

It’s below the x- axis on the intervals x<−2, −1<x<1, and x>4.

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 5 Polynomial Functions 7 1

The sketch of the graph of  f(x)=−(x−4)(x−1)(x+1)(x+2) is given below.

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Module 5 Chapter 5 Exercise 5.2 Polynomial Functions Page 255 Problem 8 Answer

It is given that f(x)=−x2(x−4).

It is required to sketch the graph of the polynomial function.

First, identify the end behavior of the graph. Then, find its x-intercepts. Now, identify the nature of the graph and draw the graph.

Identify the end behavior of the function, f(x)=−x2(x−4).

As x tends to +∞, then f(x) tends to−∞.

As x tends to −∞, then f(x) tends to +∞.

Identify the x- intercept of graph. Then, use the sign of  f(x) on the intervals determined by the x- intercept to find where the graph is above the x- axis and where It’s below the x- axis.

The x- intercept are,x=0, andx=4.

Tabulate the data and find the nature of f(x) according to each term.

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 5 Polynomial Functions 8

Plot the graph. The graph of f(x) is above the x- axis on the intervals x<0 and 0<x<4. It’s below the x- axis on the intervalsx>4.

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 5 Polynomial Functions 8 1

The graph of the function is given below:

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 5 Polynomial Functions 8 2

Page 255 Problem 9 Answer

It is given an open box is to be made from a sheet of cardboard that is 9 inches long and 5 inches wide and square flap of side x inches at each corner.

It is required to find the value of x that will produce the box with maximum volume to the nearest tenth.

First, write the dimensions of the box and obtain a volume function. Make the graph of the volume function to find the value of the dimensions.

Find the x2– intercept of graph. Identify the graphs x- intercept, and then use the sign of  f(x) on the intervals determined by the x- intercept to find where the graph is above the x- axis and where it’s below the x- axis.

Then, plot the graph and obtain the values.

Find the dimensions of the box.

The length of the box is (9−2x) inches.

The width of the box is (5−2x)inches.

The height of the box is x inches.

Write the volume function. Use the formula,V=Length×width×Height

V=(9−2x)(5−2x)x

Make the graph of the volume function to find the value of the dimensions.

Find the x- intercept of graph. Assume f(x)=(9−2x)(5−2x)x.

Identify the graphs x- intercept. The x- intercept are, x=5/2,x=0, and x=9/2.

Find the intervals of function. So, the graph of f(x)=(9−2x)(5−2x) x is determined by the following three constraints.

9−2x>0, or x<9/2

5−2x>0, or x<5/2

x>0.

Taken together, these constraints give a domain of 0<x<9/2.

The graph for function as follow f(x)=(9−2x)(5−2x)x.

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 5 Polynomial Functions 9

So, f(x)=21.0 when x≈1. Which means that the box has a maximum volume of   cub 21 ic inches when square flaps with side length of 1 inches are made in the corners of the sheet of cardboard.

It is observed that when x is equal to 1 box will have maximum volume.

Page 257 Problem 10 Answer

It is required to discuss, although the volume function has three constraints on its domain, then why domain involves only two of them.

For solving equation function it is required to know point of intercept, for volume as a function, curve will intercept at three points on x- axis, hence involves three constrain.

As each dimension must be greater than zero for real world problem.

One of the constrain is bounded by other two.

Therefore, domains involve two constrains only.

In the volume function, one of the constrain is bounded by other two. So, domain involves only two of them.

Page 257 Problem 11 Answer

It is given an open box is to be made from a sheet of cardboard that is 25 inches long and 13 inches wide and square flap of side x inches at each corner.

It is required to find the value of x that will produce the box with maximum volume to nearest tenth.

First, write the dimensions of the box and obtain a volume function. Make the graph of the volume function to find the value of the dimensions.

Find the x- intercept of graph. Identify the graphs x- intercept, and then use the sign of  f(x) on the intervals determined by the x- intercept to find where the graph is above the x- axis and where it’s below the x- axis.

Find the dimensions of the box.

The length of the box is (25−2x) inch.

The width of the box  is (13−2x) inches.

The height of the box is xinches.

Write the volume function. Use the formula, V=Length×width×Height

V=(25−2x)(13−2x)x

Make the graph of the volume function to find the value of the dimensions.

Find the x- intercept of graph. Assume f(x)=(25−2x)(13−2x)x.

Identify the graphs x- intercept.

x=25/2,x=0, and x=13/2.

Find the intervals of function. So, the graph of f(x)=(13−2x)(25−2x)x is determined by the following three constraints.

13−2x>0, or x<13/2

25−2x>0, or x<25/2 x>0.

Taken together, these constraints give a domain of 0<x<25/2.

Graph for function as follow f(x)=(13−2x)(25−2x)x.

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 5 Polynomial Functions 11

So, f(x)=402.22 when x≈3. Which means that the box has a maximum volume of 402 cubic inches when square flaps with side length of 3 inches are made in the corners of the sheet of cardboard.

It is observed that when x is equal to 3 box will have maximum volume.

Page 257 Problem 12 Answer

It is required to find why is the constant factor important when graphing the function and the function here is a polynomial function with intercept form.

The sign of the function values tells you whether the graph is above or below the x- axis on a particular interval.

Constant factor is determined by sign of the function, further help to describe the end behavior of the curve.

The constant factor changes the sign of the curve and also changes the end behavior it is an important factor.

HMH Algebra 2 Module 5 Chapter 5 Exercise 5.2 Polynomial Functions Answers

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Module 5 Chapter 5 Exercise 5.2 Polynomial Functions Page 258 Problem 13 Answer

It is given that f(x)=x7.

It is required to find function’s domain, range, and the end behavior.

Use a graphing calculator, plot the graph. Then, using the graph observe the nature and find the domain range and end behaviour,

Using a graphing calculator the graph of the function f(x)=x7 is as follows:

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 5 Polynomial Functions 13

From the above graph, it is observed that domain of the function is (−∞,+∞),  range of the function(−∞,+∞) also end behavior can be expressed as,As, x tends to +∞, then f(x) tends to+∞.

As, x tends to−∞, then f(x) tends to −∞.

Domain: (−∞,+∞)

Range: (−∞,+∞)

End behavior: Asx→+∞, f(x)→+∞ and as x→−∞, f(x)→−∞.

Page 258 Problem 14 Answer

It is given thatf(x)=−x9.

It is required to find function’s domain, range, and the end behavior.

Use a graphing calculator, plot the graph. Then, using the graph observe the nature and find the domain range and end behavior.

Using a graphing calculator, the graph of the functionf(x)=−x9 is as follows:

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 5 Polynomial Functions 14

Assumey=−x9.

The function can take all the values of the real line and give all the output values of the real line.

Therefore, the domain and range of the function will be. (−∞,+∞)

From the graph, observe that the function approaches ∞ at x=∞ and it approaches−∞ at x=−∞.

The graph of the function, f(x)=−x9 is given below.

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 5 Polynomial Functions 14 1

The following values are obtained from the graph of the function.

Domain:(−∞,+∞)

Range: (−∞,+∞)

End behavior: Asx→+∞, f(x)→−∞and as x→−∞, f(x)→∞.

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Module 5 Chapter 5 Exercise 5.2 Polynomial Functions Page 258 Problem 15 Answer

It is given that f(x)=x10.

It is required to find function’s domain, range, and the end behavior.

Use a graphing calculator, plot the graph. Then, using the graph observe the nature and find the domain range and end behavior.

Using a graphing calculator, the graph of the function f(x)=x10 is as follows:

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 5 Polynomial Functions 15

Assume y=x10.

The function can take all the values of the real line but it will give only positive output values of the real line because of an even exponent.

Therefore, the domain of the function is R and range of the function will be R+∪{0}.

From the graph, observe that the function approaches ∞at x=∞ and it approaches ∞ at x=−∞.

The graph of the function, f(x)=x10is given below.

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 5 Polynomial Functions 15

The following values are obtained from the graph of the function.

Domain: R

Range: R+∪{0}

End behavior: Asx→+∞, f(x)→∞ and as x→−∞, f(x)→∞.

Page 258 Problem 16 Answer

It is given that f(x)=−x8.

It is required to find function’s domain, range, and the end behavior.

Use a graphing calculator, plot the graph. Then, using the graph observe the nature and find the domain range and end behavior.

Using a graphing calculator, the graph of the function f(x)=−x9 is as follows:

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 5 Polynomial Functions 16

Assume y=−x8. The function can take all the values of the real line but it will give only negative output values of the real line because of a negative at the beginning.

Therefore, the domain of the function is R and range of the function will be R−∪{0}.

From the graph, observe that the function approaches−∞

at x=∞ and it approaches −∞ at x=−∞.

The graph of the function, f(x)=−x8 is given below.

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 5 Polynomial Functions 16 1

The following values are obtained from the graph of the function.

Domain: R

Range: R−∪{0}

End behavior: As x→+∞, f(x)→−∞ and as x→−∞, f(x)→−∞.

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Module 5 Chapter 5 Exercise 5.2 Polynomial Functions Page 258 Problem 17 Answer

It is given that f(x)=x(x+1)(x+3).

It is required to graph the function using a  graphing calculator and use the graph to determine the turning points and the type of maximum and minimum values.

Use a graphing calculator, plot the graph. Then, using the graph observe the nature and find the required values.

Use a graphing calculator and plot f(x)=x(x+1)(x+3).

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 5 Polynomial Functions 17 1

Now, from the graph observe that graph changes its concavity at two points. So, there are two turning points.

Those two turning points are (−2.215,2.113) and (−0.45,−0.63).

The function is at peak at the point  (−2.215,2.113) and at it lowest peak at (−0.45,−0.63).

Therefore,(−2.215,2.113) is local maxima and (−0.45,−0.63) is the local minima.

The graph of the function is given below and the function has following attributes.

Turning points: 2

Turning points coordinates: (−2.215,2.113), (−0.45,−0.63).

Local maxima:(−2.215,2.113)

Local minimum: (−0.45,−0.63)

Global maximum or minimum: None

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 5 Polynomial Functions 17

Page 258 Problem 18 Answer

It is given that f(x)=(x+1)2(x−1)(x−2).

It is required to graph the function using a  graphing calculator and use the graph to determine the turning points and the type of maximum and minimum values.

Use a graphing calculator, plot the graph. Then, using the graph observe the nature and find the required values.

Use a graphing calculator and plot f(x)=(x+1)2(x−1)(x−2).

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 5 Polynomial Functions 18

Now, from the graph observe that graph changes its concavity at three points. So, there are three turning points.

Those three turning points are (0.157,2.08), (1.593,−1.623) and(−1,0).

The function is at peak at the point  (0.157,2.08) and at minimum at (−1,0).

Therefore, (0.157,2.08) is local maxima and (−1,0) is the local minima. The global minima is(1.593,−1.623).

The graph of the function is given below and the function has following attributes.

Turning points: 3

Turning points coordinates: (0.157,2.08), (1.593,−1.623) and (−1,0).

Local maxima:(0.157,2.08)

Local minimum: (−1,0)

Global minimum: (1.593,−1.623)

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 5 Polynomial Functions 18 1

Page 258 Problem 19 Answer

It is given that f(x)=−x(x−1)(x+2)2.

It is required to graph the function using a  graphing calculator and use the graph to determine the turning points and the type of maximum and minimum values.

Use a graphing calculator, plot the graph. Then, using the graph observe the nature and find the required values.

Use a graphing calculator and plot f(x)=−x(x−1)(x+2)2.

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 5 Polynomial Functions 19

Now, from the graph observe that graph changes its concavity at three points. So, there is only one turning point, (0.25,8.543).

And the function has global minimum atx=0.25.

The graph of the function is given below and the function has following attributes.

Turning points: 1

Turning points coordinates: (0.25,8.543)

Local maxima: None

Local minimum: None

Global minimum:(0.25,8.543)

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 5 Polynomial Functions 19 1

Page 259 Problem 20 Answer

It is given that f(x)=−x(x−2)2.

It is required to graph the function.

Use a graphing calculator, and plot the graph of the given function.

Use a graphing calculator and plot f(x)=−x(x−2)2.

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 5 Polynomial Functions 20

The graph of the function is given below.

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 5 Polynomial Functions 20 1

HMH Algebra 2 Chapter 5 Exercise 5.2 Polynomial Functions Key

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Module 5 Chapter 5 Exercise 5.2 Polynomial Functions Page 259 Problem 21 Answer

It is given that f(x)=−x(x+1)(x−2)(x−3).

It is required to graph the function.

Use a graphing calculator, and plot the graph of the given function.

Use a graphing calculator and plot f(x)=−x(x+1)(x−2)(x−3).

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 5 Polynomial Functions 21

The graph of the function is given below.

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 5 Polynomial Functions 21 1

Page 260 Problem 22 Answer

It is given an open-top box out of cardboard that is 6 inches long and 3 inches wide, you make a square flap of side length x inches in each corner by cutting along one of the flap’s sides and folding along the other.

Once you fold up the four sides of the box, you glue each flap to the side it overlaps.

It is required to find the value of x

that maximize the volume of the box.

To find the required answer, find the dimension of the box once the flaps have been made and the sides have been folded up.

Create a volume function for the box. Maximize the volume for a given x, differentiate the volume with respect to x, and equal to zero, to find the value of x that maximizes the volume.

Write expression for the dimension of the box.

The length of the box is 6−2x units.

The width of box is3−2x units.

The height of the box is x units.

Now write the volume function and determine its domain. Use the formula, V=Length×width×Height.

Substitute length as 6−2x, breadth as 3−2x, and height as x in the above formula and simplify.

​V=(6−2x)(3−2x)x

=(6×3−6×2x−2x×3+2x×3x)×x

=(18−12x−6x+6x2)×x

=4x3−18x2+18x

Thus, the volume function is V=4x3−18x2+18x.

To maximize the volume for a given x, differentiate the volume with respect to x and equal to zero.

Use the power rule of differentiation,d/dx(xn)=nxn−1.

​dV/dx=0

d/dx(4x3−18x2+18x)=0

12x3−36x+18=0

Here, the x has two values 2.366 and 0.634. Since the value of x cannot be more than half the width 3,  choose x=0.634, that maximize the volume.

Find the maximum volume.

Substitute x as 0.634 in V=4x3−18x2+18x and simplify.

​Vmax

=4(0.634)3−18(0.634)2+18(0.634)

=1.019−7.235+11.412

=5.196

Hence, the maximum volume is 5.196 inches 3.

The value of x that maximize the volume of the box is 0.634. Also, the maximum volume is 5.196 inches 3.

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Module 5 Chapter 5 Exercise 5.2 Polynomial Functions Page 261 Problem 23 Answer

It is given a graph of a polynomial that cuts the x axis at 4 points.

It is required to find a quadratic function in intercept form for the given graph whose x-intercepts are integers assuming that the constant factor a is either 1 or−1.

First, identify the x-intercept that means find out the points where the curve cut the x axis, make them in factor form.

Then, write the polynomial as product of all the factors and assume the constant as 1 to get the function.

Analyse the given graph, where it cuts the x axis. Therefore, it cuts the axis at x=−3,x=0,x=4, and x=2.

Let P(x) be the polynomial.

As x=−3 is a zero so, (x+3) is a factor.

As x=0 is a zero so, x is a factor.

As x=4 is a zero so, (x−2) is a factor.

As x=2 is a zero so, (x−4) is a factor.

The polynomial is factored form will beP(x)=ax(x+3)(x−2)(x−4).

Check the end behavior of the polynomial.

The end behavior of the polynomial is x→∞ then, P(x)→∞ and when x→−∞ then, P(x)→∞ Therefore, a=1.

Thus,P(x)=x(x+3)(x−2)(x−4) is the required function.

The quadratic function in intercept form for the given graph isP(x)=x(x+3)(x−2)(x−4).

Page 261 Problem 24 Answer

It is given a graph of a polynomial that touches the x axis at 2 points.

It is required to find a quadratic function in intercept form for the given graph whose x-intercepts are integers assuming that the constant factor a is either 1 or −1.

First, identify the x-intercept that means find out the points where the curve cut the x axis, make them in factor form.

Then, write the polynomial as product of all the factors and assume the constant as 1 to get the function.

Analyse the given graph, where it cuts the x-axis. Therefore, it cuts the axis at x=3, and x=−2.

Let P(x) be the polynomial.

As x=3 is a zero of multiplicity so, (x−3)2 is a factor.

Asx=−2 is a zero of multiplicity so,(x+2)2 is a factor.

The polynomial is factored form will be P(x)=a(x−3)2(x+2)2.

Check the end behaviour of the polynomial.

The end behaviour of the polynomial is x→∞ then, P(x)→−∞ and whenx→−∞ then, P(x)→−∞.

Therefore, a=−1.

Thus, P(x)=−(x−3)2(x+2)2 is the required function.

The quadratic function in intercept form for the given graph is P(x)=−(x−3)2(x+2)2.

HMH Algebra 2 Exercise 5.2 Polynomial Functions Answer Guide

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Module 5 Chapter 5 Exercise 5.2 Polynomial Functions Page 262 Problem 25 Answer

It is given a function f(x)=(x−1)2(x+2).

It is required to find the statement that  the x-intercept are x=1 and x=−2 is applicable or not for the given function.

To find, the statement true or not draw the graph of f(x)=(x−1)2(x+2) using a graphing calculator.

Find out the x intercept. Then check the obtained point are same or not with the given statement to find out is the given statement applicable or not.

Draw the graph of f(x)=(x−1)2(x+2) using a graphing calculator.

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 5 Polynomial Functions 25

From the graph, it is observed that the curve cuts the x axis at x=−2 and the curve touches the x axis at x=1.

It means the curve is tangent to the x-axis at x=1.

Therefore the statement that the x-intercept are x=1 and x=−2 is applicable.

Statement A: The x-intercepts of f(x) are x=1 and x=−2 is true for the function f(x)=(x−1)2(x+2).

Page 262 Problem 26 Answer

It is given a function f(x)=(x−1)2(x+2).

It is required to find the statement that  the x-intercept are x=−1 and x=2 is applicable or not for the given function.

To find, the statement true or not draw the graph of f(x)=(x−1)2(x+2) using a graphing calculator.

Find out the x-intercept. Then check the obtained point are same or not with the given statement to find out is the given statement applicable or not.

Draw the graph of f(x)=(x−1)2 (x+2) using a graphing calculator.

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 5 Polynomial Functions 26

From the graph, it is observed that the curve cuts the x axis atx=−2 and the curve touches the x axis at x=1.

It means the curve is tangent to the xaxis atx=1.

Therefore,  the statement that the x intercept arex=−1 and x=2 is not applicable for the given function.

Statement B: The x-intercepts of f(x) are x=−1 and x=2 is not true for the function f(x)=(x−1)2(x+2).

Page 262 Problem 27 Answer

It is given a function f(x)=(x−1)2(x+2).

It is required to find whether the statement that the graph cross the $x$ axis and x=1, and is tangent to the x axis atx=−2 applies to the function or not.

To find, the statement true or not draw the graph of f(x)=(x−1)2(x+2)

using a graphing calculator. Find out the x intercept.

Then, check the obtained point are same or not with the given statement to find out is the given statement applicable or not.

Draw the graph of f(x)=(x−1)2(x+2) using a graphing calculator.

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 5 Polynomial Functions 27

From the graph it is observed that the curve does not cross the x axis at x=1 and it is not tangent to x=−2.

Therefore, this is not applicable for the given function.

Statement C: The graph cross the x axis and x=1, and is tangent to the x axis at x=−2 is not true for the function f(x)=(x−1)2(x+2).

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Module 5 Chapter 5 Exercise 5.2 Polynomial Functions Page 262 Problem 28 Answer

It is given a function f(x)=(x−1)2(x+2).

It is required to find the statement that the graph cross the x-axis atx=−1, and is tangent to the x axis at x=2 is applicable or not for the given function.

To find, the statement true or not draw the graph of f(x)=(x−1)2(x+2) and find out the x-intercept means find the point where the curve cut the x axis.

Then check the obtained point are same or not with the given statement to find out is the given statement applicable or not.

Draw the graph of f(x)=(x−1)2(x+2).

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 5 Polynomial Functions 28

From the graph it is observed that the curve does not cross the x axis at  x=−1, and is tangent to the x axis at x=2 is not applicable for the given function.

Statement D: The graph crosses the x-axis atx=−1, and is tangent to the x axis at x=2 not applicable for the given function

f(x)=(x−1)2(x+2).

Page 262 Problem 29 Answer

It is given a function, f(x)=(x−1)2(x+2).

It is required to tell whether the graph is tangent to the x-axis at x=1 and crosses the x-axis at x=−2.

Plot the lines on the graph off(x)=(x−1)2(x+2) which is inferred from part (A).

Then, observe the graph and get the required answer.

Plot the linex=1 and x=−2 on the graph off(x)=(x−1)2(x+2).

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 5 Polynomial Functions 29

From the graph observe that the graph is tangent to the x-axis atx=1 and crosses the x-axis at x=−2.

Therefore, the statement applies.

The statement E applies to the graph of f(x)=(x−1)2(x+2).

Page 262 Problem 30 Answer

It is given a functionf(x)=(x−1)2(x+2).

It is required to find whether the statement that the graph is tangent to the x-axis at x=−1, and is tangent to the x-axis at x=2 applies to the function or not.

To find, the statement true or not draw the graph of f(x)=(x−1)2(x+2)using a graphing calculator.

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 5 Polynomial Functions 30

Find out the x intercept. Then, check the obtained point are same or not with the given statement to find out is the given statement applicable or not.

Draw the graph of f(x)=(x−1)2(x+2) using a graphing calculator.

From the graph it is observed that the curve is not tangent to the x-axis at x=−1, and is tangent to the x-axis at x=2.

Therefore, the is not applicable for the given function.

Statement C: The graph is tangent to the x-axis at x=−1, and is tangent to the x-axis at x=2 is not true for the function f(x)=(x−1)2(x+2).

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Module 5 Chapter 5 Exercise 5.2 Polynomial Functions Page 262 Problem 31 Answer

It is given a function f(x)=(x−1)2(x+2).

It is required to find whether the statement that the graph is a local, but not global minimum occurs at interval −2<x<1, and a local, but not global, maximum occurs at x=1 applies to the function or not.

The graph inferred from part(a) is as follows.

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 5 Polynomial Functions 31

Observe that the graph is increasing in the interval −2<x<1.

So, it cannot be the global minimum.

The global maximum cannot occur at x=1 because the value of function is zero at that point but actually the value of function increases.

Therefore, the given statement is not valid.

The statement the graph is a local, but not global minimum occurs at interval −2<x<1, and a local, but not global, maximum occurs at x=1

does not apply to the function or not.

Page 262 Problem 32 Answer

It is given a function f(x)=(x−1)2(x+2)

.It is required to find whether the statement that the graph is a local, but not global maximum occurs at interval −2<x<1 , and a local, but not global, minimum occurs at x=1

applies to the function or not.

The graph inferred from part(a) is as follows.

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 5 Polynomial Functions 32

Observe that the graph is increasing in the interval −2<x<1.

So, it is the global minimum.

Therefore, the given statement is valid.

The statement the graph is a local, but not global maximum occurs at interval −2<x<1, and a local, but not global, minimum occurs at x=1 applies to the function.

Page 262 Problem 33 Answer

It is given a function f(x)=(x−1)2(x+2).

It is required to find whether the statement that the graph is a local, but not global minimum occurs at interval −1<x<2, and a local, but not global, maximum occurs at x=2 applies to the function or not.

The graph inferred from part(a) is as follows.

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 5 Polynomial Functions 33

By observing the graph it is deduced that the given statement is invalid.

The statement the graph is a local, but not global maximum occurs at interval −1<x<2, and a local, but not global, minimum occurs at x=2 does not apply to the function.

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Module 5 Chapter 5 Exercise 5.2 Polynomial Functions Page 262 Problem 34 Answer

It is given a function f(x)=(x−1)2(x+2).

It is required to find whether the statement that the graph is a local, but not global maximum occurs at interval −1<x<2, and a local, but not global, minimum occurs at x=2

applies to the function or not.

The graph inferred from part(a) is as follows.

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 5 Polynomial Functions 34

By observing the graph it is deduced that the given statement is invalid.

The statement the graph is a local, but not global maximum occurs at interval−1<x<2, and a local, but not global, minimum occurs at x=2 does not apply to the function.

Page 266 Exercise 1, Answer

It is to require to identify the transformation of the graph f(x)=x3 to produce the graph of the function

g(x)=(−1/4(x+2))3+3.

The given cubic function is of the form h(x)=a(1/b(x−h))3+k.

For g(x), h=−2,k=3, b=−1/4, and a=1.

Thus, according to the rule of the cubic function h(x), first, do a vertical translation of 3 units up.

Then, a horizontal translation of 2 units left followed by a horizontal sketch by a factor of 4.

Then, finally reflect the curve obtained about x-axis.

The required transformation is vertical translation of 3 units up.

Then, a horizontal translation of 2 units left followed by a horizontal sketch by a factor of 4.

Finally, reflect the curve obtained about x-axis.

Page 266 Exercise 2, Answer

It is to require to identify the transformation of the graph f(x)=x3 to produce the graph of the function h(x)=1/3(x−4)3.

The given cubic function is of the form h(x)=a(1/b(x−h))3+k.

For g(x), h=4,k=0, b=1, and a=1/3.

Thus, according to the rule of the cubic function h(x), first, do a horizontal translation of 4 units right.

Then, a vertical compression by a factor of 3.

The required transformation is a horizontal translation of 4  units right followed by a vertical compression by a factor of 3.

Step-By-Step Solutions For HMH Algebra 2 Module 5 Exercise 5.2

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Module 5 Chapter 5 Exercise 5.2 Polynomial Functions Page 266 Exercise 3, Answer

It is given that s(x)=x(x+2)(x+1)2.

It is required to determine the number of turning points, global maximums and minimums, and local maximums and minimums.

First, make the graph of the function using a graphing calculator. Then, observe the maximum and minimum, and all other required values.

Graph the function s(x)=x(x+2)(x+1)2using a graphing calculator.

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 5 Polynomial Functions 3

The turning points lie at (−1.70,−0.25), (−1,0), (−0.29,−0.25)

From the graph observe that there are no global minima or global maxima because the concavity of the curve is changing frequently.

The local minima occur at (−1.70,−0.25), and (−0.29,−0.25).

The maxima occur at (−1,0).

According to the graph, there are three turning points, one local maximum, no global minimum.

The turning points are (−1.70,−0.25), (−1,0), (−0.29,−0.25).

The local minima is at (−1.70,−0.25), and (−0.29,−0.25), and the maxima occur at(−1,0).

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 5 Polynomial Functions 3 1

Page 266 Exercise 4, Answer

It is given that h(x)=x2(x−3)(x+2)(x−2).

It is required to determine the number of turning points, global maximums and minimums, and local maximums and minimums.

First, make the graph of the function using a graphing calculator. Then, observe the maximum and minimum, and all other required values.

Graph the function h(x)=x2(x−3)(x+2)(x−2) using a graphing calculator.

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 5 Polynomial Functions 4

The turning points lie at (0,0),(2.53,−7.24),(1.24,6.66), and (−1.47,17.76).

From the graph observe that there are no global minima or global maxima because the concavity of the curve is changing frequently.

The local minima occur at (0,0), and (2.53,−7.24).

The maxima occur at (1.24,6.66).

According to the graph, there are three turning points, one local maximum, no global minimum.

The turning points are (0,0),(2.53,−7.24),(1.24,6.66), and .

The local minima is at (2.53,−7.24), and (0,0), and the maxima occur at (1.24,6.66).

Page 266 Exercise 5, Answer

It is required to write a real-world situation that could be modeled by the equation V(ω)=ω(5ω)(3ω).

Consider a cuboidal tank of length ω,width 5ω units and height 3ω units.

The volume of a cuboidal tank is the product of its length, breadth, and height.

Let V be volume of cuboid then volume of cuboid isV(ω)=ω(5ω)(3ω).

The equation V(ω)=ω(5ω)(3ω) can be modeled as the volume of a cuboidal tank with side lengths, ω, 5ω, and 3ω.

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Module 5 Chapter 5 Exercise 5.2 Polynomial Functions Page 266 Exercise 6, Answer

It is given function that g(x)=−1/4(x+4)3.

It is to require to identify changes to y when the graph of f(x)=x3 is transformed to get the graph of g(x).

Identify the transformation that is done to the y coordinates and apply them to the coordinates.

On y-axis, compress f(x)= x3 by factor 0.25 along the vertical axis.

The y-coordinates of the reference points are −1, 0, and 1.

Therefore, changes in y are−0.25(−1)=0.25,−0.25(0)=0,and−0.25(1)=−0.25.

The changes toy are −1 becomes 0.25, 0 becomes 0, and 1 becomes 0.25.

The values of y after the changes is 0.25, 0, and 0.25.

Page 267 Exercise 7, Answer

It is given function f(x)=x3and g(x)=−1/4(x+4)3.

It is required to identify the transformation using the changes to x, and y and complete the table.

To do so, use the values of x obtained in question 1 and 2. Substitute it in the function f(x) and g(x) and fill the tables with the required values.

To get the graph of g(x)=−1/4(x+4)3, the graph of f(x)=x3compressed vertically and translated to left.

On substituting values obtained from question 1 and 2.

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 5 Polynomial Functions 7

The complete table as follows:

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 5 Polynomial Functions 7 1

Page 267 Exercise 8, Answer

It is given that g(x)=x2(x−3).

It is required to graph the function using a graphing calculator and state the number of turning points, and the x- intercepts.

Use a graphing calculator, plot the function. Observe the turning points.

Given, g(x)=x2(x−3).The graph is as follows.

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 5 Polynomial Functions 8

Observe the graph, it has turning points are (0,0) and (2,−4).

The x intercepts are at x=0, and x=3.

The function is at peak at the point  (0,0) and at its lowest peak at (2,−4).

Therefore, (0,0) is local maxima and (2,−4) is the local minima.

The graph of the function is given below.

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 5 Polynomial Functions 8 1

Number of turning points: 2 Turning points: (0,0) and (2,−4).

x-intercept: x=0,3

Local maxima: (0,0)

Local Minimum:(2,−4)

Page 267 Exercise 9, Answer

It is given thath(x)=(x−4)(x−3)(x+2)2.

It is required to graph the function using a graphing calculator and state the number of turning points, and the x- intercepts.

Use a graphing calculator, plot the function. Observe the turning points.

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 5 Polynomial Functions 9

Given,h(x)=(x−4)(x−3)(x+2)2.

The graph is a Observe the graph, it has three turning points, that are, (−2,0), (0.705,55.332), and (3.545,−7.624).

The x-intercepts are at x=−2, and x=3, and x=4.

The function is at peak at the point  (0.705,55.332) and at its lowest peak at two points, (−2,0) and (3.545,−7.624).

Therefore, (0.705,55.332) is local maxima and (−2,0), and (3.545,−7.624) is the local minima.

The graph of the function is given below.

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 5 Polynomial Functions 9 1

Number of turning points: 3

Turning points: (−2,0),(0.705,55.332), and (3.545,−7.624).

x-intercept: x=−2, 4, 3

Local maxima: (0.705,55.332)

Local Minimum: (−2,0) and (3.545,−7.624)

HMH Algebra 2 Chapter 5 Polynomial Functions Exercise 5.2 Solutions

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Module 5 Chapter 5 Exercise 5.2 Polynomial Functions Page 267 Exercise 10, Answer

It is required to give an example of a cubic function.The volume of a cube or cylinder is an example of a cubic function from the real world

Assume a cube with length, x, width x, and height x.

Then, its volume will be the product of all the side lengths.

Therefore, the volume will be x3, which is a cubic function.

Hence, the volume of a cube can be treated as an example of a cubic function from real world.

The volume of a sphere as a function of the radius of the sphere is a cubic function.

Similarly, the volume of a cube as a function of the length of one of its sides is a cubic function.

Page 268 Exercise 11, Answer

Three functions are given.

It is required to tell whether the vertex of the graph translated to the right and up when compared to f(x)=x3.

Check the transformations of y=(x+3)3+2.

Use a graphing calculator, and graph y=(x+3)3+2.

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 5 Polynomial Functions11

Observe that the vertex is translated left and up.

Check the transformations of y=5x3+7.

Use a graphing calculator, and graph y=5x3+7.

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 5 Polynomial Functions 11 1

Observe that the vertex is translated up only.

Check the transformations of y=(x−4)3+2.

Use a graphing calculator, and graph y=(x−4)3+2.

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 5 Polynomial Functions 11 2

Observe that the vertex is translated four units to the right and 2 units up.

The following are the answers for the given polynomials:

y=(x+3)3+2:No y=5x3+7: No y=(x−4)3+2 : Yes

Page 268 Exercise 12, Answer

It is given that h(x)=x(x−1)(x+3)3.

It is required to find whether the given three sentences are true or false.

Make the graph of the given function using the graphing calculator. Now, observe the curve and answer the sentences.

Using a graphing calculator, plot the function.

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 5 Polynomial Functions 12

The graph has three turning points. So, the statement the graph has four turning points is false.

Observe the graph, it crosses the x-axis at −3, 0, and 1.

The statement that the graph crosses the x-axis at −3, −1, 0, and 1 is not true.

A maximum or minimum is said to be global if it is the largest or smallest value of the function, respectively, on the entire domain of a function.

The domain of the given function is all real numbers.

From the graph, observe that it does not have any specific smallest value or any specific largest value with respect to the domain.

Therefore, there are no global maxima and minima.

The statement A and B are false and statement C is true.

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Module 5 Chapter 5 Exercise 5.2 Polynomial Functions Page 268 Exercise 13, Answer

It is given a graph of a polynomial that cuts the x-axis at 4 points.

It is required to find a quadratic function in intercept form for the given graph whose x-intercepts are integers assuming that the constant factor a is either 1 or −1.

First, identify the x intercept that means find out the points where the curve cut thexaxis, make them in factor form.

Then, write the polynomial as product of all the factors and assume the constant as 1 to get the function.

Analyse the given graph, where it cuts the xaxis. Therefore, it cuts the axis at x=−2,x=0,x=3, andx=5.

Let P(x) be the polynomial.

As x=−2 is a zero so, (x+2) is a factor.

As x=0 is a zero so, x is a factor.

As x=3 is a zero so, (x−3) is a factor.

As x=5 is a zero so, (x−4) is a factor.

The polynomial is factored form will be P(x)=ax(x+2)(x−3)(x−5).

Check the end behaviour of the polynomial.

The end behaviour of the polynomial is x→∞ then, P(x)→∞  and when x→−∞ then, P(x)→∞.

Therefore, a=1. Thus, P(x)=x(x+2)(x−3)(x−5) is the required function.

The quartic function in intercept form for the given graph isP(x)=x(x+2)(x−3)(x−5).

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Module 5 Chapter 5 Exercise 5.1 Polynomial Functions

 

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Module 5 Chapter 5 Exercise 5.1 Polynomial Functions

Page 234 Problem 1 Answer

It is given an expression 3×3. It is required to classify the polynomial by its degree and number of terms.

The degree of the polynomial is 3. The polynomial has only one term so, it is a monomial.

Thus, 3×3 is a cubic polynomial with one term.

The given expression, 3×3 is a cubic monomial.

Page 234 Problem 2 Answer

It is given an expression 9x−3y+7. It is required to classify the polynomial by its degree and number of terms.

The degree of the polynomial is 1. The polynomial has three terms so, it is a trinomial.

Thus, 9x−3y+7 is a linear trinomial.

The given expression, 9x−3y+7 is a linear trinomial.

Page 234 Problem 3 Answer

It is given an expression x2−4. It is required to classify the polynomial by its degree and number of terms.

The degree of the polynomial is 2. The polynomial has two terms so, it is a binomial.

Thus, x2−4  is a quadratic binomial.

The given expression, x2−4 is a quadratic binomial.

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Module 5 Chapter 5 Exercise 5.1 Polynomial Functions

Page 234 Problem 4 Answer

It is given an expression x5+x4. It is required to classify the polynomial by its degree and number of terms.

The degree of the polynomial is 5. Thus, it is a quintic polynomial. The polynomial has two terms so, it is a binomial.

Thus, x2−4  is a quintic binomial.

The given expression, x5+x4  is a quintic binomial.

HMH Algebra 2 Module 5 Chapter 5 Exercise 5.1 Solutions

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Module 5 Chapter 5 Exercise 5.1 Polynomial Functions Page 234 Problem 5 Answer

It is given an expression 5x3−7y2+2. It is required to classify the polynomial by its degree and number of terms.

The degree of the polynomial is 3. Thus, it is a cubic polynomial The polynomial has three terms so, it is a trinomial.

Thus, 5x3−7y2+2  is a cubic trinomial.

The given expression, 5x3−7y2+2 is a cubic trinomial.

Page 234 Problem 6 Answer

It is given an expression x. It is required to classify the polynomial by its degree and number of terms.

The degree of the polynomial is 1. The polynomial has one terms so, it is a monomial.

Thus, x is a linear monomial.

The given expression x is a linear monomial.

Page 234 Problem 7 Answer

It is given a functionh(x)=0.25(x−6)3−1 .

It is required to find the new function after the transformation of 10 units left, 7 units down.

To find the required transformation identify the inflection point then transform it as per given instruction, for x a xis the right direction is positive and left direction is negative, for y

axis up direction is positive and down direction is negative.

The inflection points on h(x)=0.25(x−6)3−1 is (6,−1).

Now, the transformation of 10 units left is (6−10)=−4.

The transformation of 7 units down is (−1−7)=−8  as the downward sides of y axis negative.

Now, the transformed inflection point is (−4,−8).

The new function after transformation ish(x)=0.25(x+4)3−8.

The new function after transformation is h(x)=0.25(x+4)3−8.

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Module 5 Chapter 5 Exercise 5.1 Polynomial Functions Page 234 Problem 8 Answer

It is given a function h(x)=(x+9)3−5.

It is required to find the new function after the transformation of 6 units right, 4 units up.

To find the required transformation identify the inflection point then transform it as per given instruction, for x axis the right direction is positive and left direction is negative, for y

axis up direction is positive and down direction is negative.

The inflection points on h(x)=(x+9)3−5 is (−9,−5).

Now, the transformation of 6 units right is (−9+6)=−3  as the right direction of x  axis is positive.

The transformation of 4  units up is (−5+4)=−1  as the up sides of y axis is positive.

Now, the transformed inflection point is (−3,−1).

The new function after transformation is h′(x)=(x+3)3−1.

The new function after transformation is h′(x)=(x+3)3−1 of the transformation of 6 units right, 4

units up of the given function h(x)=(x+9)3−5.

Page 234 Problem 9 Answer

It is given a function f(x)=x3.

It is required to find the new function after the transformation of 3 units right,  2 units up.

To find the required transformation identify the inflection point then transform it as per given instruction, for x axis the right direction is positive and left direction is negative, for y

axis up direction is positive and down direction is negative.

The inflection points on f(x)=x3 is  (0,0).

Now, the transformation of 3  units right is (0+3)=3  as the right direction of x axis is positive.

The transformation of 2 units up is(0+2)=2  as the up sides of y axis is positive.

Now, the transformed inflection point is (3,2)

The new function after transformation is f′(x)=(x−3)3+2.

The new function after transformation is f′(x)=(x−3)3+2.

Polynomial Functions Exercise 5.1 Answers HMH Algebra 2

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Module 5 Chapter 5 Exercise 5.1 Polynomial Functions Page 234 Problem 10 Answer

It is given a function g(x)=5(x+1)3−4.

It is required to find the new function after the transformation of 1  units right,4 units up.

To find the required transformation identify the inflection point then transform it as per given instruction, for x axis the right direction is positive and left direction is negative, for y axis up direction is positive and down direction is negative.

The inflection points on g(x)=5(x+1)3−4  is (−1,−4).

Now, the transformation of 1 units right is(−1+1)=0 as the right direction of x axis is positive.

The transformation of 4 units up is (−4+4)=0  as the up sides of y axis is positive.

Now, the transformed inflection point is (0,0).

The new function after transformation is given by,​g′(x)=5(x−0)3+0=5×3

​The new function after transformation is g′(x)=5×3.

Page 235 Problem 11 Answer

It is required to explain that how the given two functions  f(x)=a(x−h)3+k and f(x)=(1/b(x−h))3+k is related to f(x)=x3.

Three of the given function has the highest power of variables 3, it means their degree is 3 so they are all cubic function.

The cubic function f(x)=x3 has three factors, all of which happen to be x . one or more of the xs can be replaced with other linear factors in  x

like this given two functions f(x)=a(x−h)3+k and  f(x)=(1/b(x−h))3+k  without changing the fact that the function is cubic.

Thus, the cubic function f(x)=x3 is the parent function of the given two other function.

The cubic function f(x)=xis the parent function of the given two other function

f(x)=a(x−h)3+k and  f(x)=(1/b(x−h))3+k

because the other two are the cubic polynomial.

Every cubic polynomial has the parent function asf(x)=x3.

HMH Algebra 2 Chapter 5 Exercise 5.1 Solutions Guide

Page 236 Problem 12 Answer

It is given the cubic function f(x)=x3.

It is required to find that how can one characterize the rate of change of the function on the intervals [−1,0]  and [0,1] compared with the rate change on the intervals [−2,−1] and [1,2].

To find the required answer obtain the rate change for each interval by f(b)−f(a)/b−a.

As the given function have only x variables so, find the changing rate for the x component on the given intervals [−1,0],[0,1] and [−2,−1] ,[1,2] and compare both obtained values.

The x component  of the intervals[−1,0],[0,1] are−1  and 0.

Thus, the interval is[−1,0].

Now, the rate change for [−1,0] is

​f(0)−f(−1) /0−1

=0−(−1)3/−1

=1/−1

=−1

​Similarly, the x component  of the intervals[−2,−1],[1,2] are−2 and 1 .

Thus,  the interval is [−2,1]. the rate change for[−2,1] is

​f(1)−f(−2)/1−(−2)

=13/−(−2)3/1+3

=1−(−8)/4

=9/4

Thus, the rate change for the interval [−1,0]  is −1

and the rate change for the interval [−2,1] is 9/4 or 2.2.

So, the value of  rate change for the interval [−1,0]

is less than the rate change for the interval [−2,1].

Therefore,  the rate of change of the function on the intervals [−1,0] and [0,1]

is less than the rate change on the intervals [−2,−1] and [1,2].

The rate of change of the function on the intervals [−1,0] and [0,1]  is less than the rate change on the intervals[−2,−1] and [1,2].

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Module 5 Chapter 5 Exercise 5.1 Polynomial Functions Page 236 Problem 13 Answer

It is given a cubic function f(x)=x3.

It is required to explain the given function symmetric about the origin or not.

To find the required answer, first draw the graph off(x)=x3 then find it whether it symmetric about where or not.

Make the graph of f(x)=x3.

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 5 Polynomial Functions 14

For a function to be symmetrical about the origin ,replace y with −y and x with −x and the resulting function must be equal to the original function.

There is no variable y in the given function, so substitute x as −x and check.

​f(−x)=(−x)3

f(−x)=−x3

​Now, make the graph off(−x)=−x3.

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 5 Polynomial Functions 14 1

From the two graph it is clearly shows that the graph is symmetric about the origin as every point (x,y) on the graph, the point (−x,−y) is also on the graph.

Thus, the function f(x)=x3 is symmetry about the origin.

The function f(x)=x3 is symmetric about the origin as every point (x,y) on the graph, the point (−x,−y) is also on the graph.

Page 236 Problem 14 Answer

It is given that the graph of the function, $g(x)=(−x)3 is a reflection of the graph of f(x)=x3across the y-axis while the graph of h(x)=−x3 is the reflection of f(x) across the x-axis.

It is required to explain the similarity or differences between the graph of  h(x) and g(x) when graphed using a graphing calculator.

First, plot f(x), g(x), and h(x) using the graphing calculator. Further, notice any similarities or differences in the graph of the function.

Plot the function,f(x),g(x), and h(x).

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 5 Polynomial Functions 15

From the graph it is observed that g(x), and h(x) are equivalent function. Therefore, both have the same graph.

The graph of the function g(x)=(−x)3and h(x)=−x3 is equivalent.

Page 238 Problem 15 Answer

It is given a function, g(x)=−12(x−3)3. the graph of g(x) is produced by transforming the graph of g(x).

It is required to identify the transformation used and graph the function on the same coordinate plane of f(x) using the reference points, (−1,−1), (0,0), and(1,1)

Take a reflection of given graph f(x)=x3 further compress graph by factor 0.5 vertically and translate by factor 3 to the right.

Now, make a table with x and y coordinates of function g(x)=−12(x−3)3, and plot the graph with help of coordinates accordingly.

The transformation used to get the graph of g(x) from f(x)  is the reflection of f(x) along y-axis followed by a dilation of scale factor 12, further followed by a translation of 3 units to the right.

The final coordinates will be as follows.

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 5 Polynomial Functions 16

The ordered pairs are (2,0.5),(3,0), and (4,−0.5).

Plot the ordered pairs obtained and get the graph of g(x).

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 5 Polynomial Functions 16 1

The graph of the function g(x) is as follows:

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 5 Polynomial Functions 16 2

How To Solve Polynomial Functions Exercise 5.1 HMH Algebra 2

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Module 5 Chapter 5 Exercise 5.1 Polynomial Functions Page 239 Problem 16 Answer

The general equation for cubic function, g(x)=(1b(x−h))3+k is given along with the function’s graph.

It is to write a specific equation by identifying the values of the parameters from the reference point as shown in the graph.

Identify the values of h and k using the graph. Then, find the value of the constant a.

Thus, substitute the value in the equation and get the required answer.

Identify the values of h and k from the point of symmetry. Here, (h,k)=(1,−1).

Therefore, h=1, and k=−1. Identify the values of a. The right most point has general coordinates  (h+b,1+k).

Substituting 1 for h, and -1 for k.

​​(h+b,1+k)=(1+b,0)

(1+b,0)=(5,0)

​Equate 1+b with 5. Subtract 1 from both sides to solve for b.

​​1+b=5

b=5−1

b=4

​Therefore, b=4.

Find the equation of the function.

Substitute b as 4, h as 1, and k as −1 in the equation g(x)=a(x−h)3+k.g(x)=(1/4(x−1))3−1

Therefore, the required function is g(x)=(1/4(x−1))3−1.

The required function is g(x)=(1/4(x−1))3−1.

Page 234 Problem 17 Answer

It is required to discuss why it is important to plot multiple points on the graph of the volume function.Mass and volume are related through density.

Volume function graphs can be expressed as graph changing mass and dimension of object keeping density constant.Hence, volume function graphs can be represented by cubic function.

The value of function keeps on changing at every dimension.Now, as the graph keeps on changing at all dimensions, multiple points are plotted to ensure accuracy of the graph.

The volume function is a cubic function. Multiple points are plotted to ensure the accuracy of the graph.

Page 242 Problem 18 Answer

It is given a function, f(x)=x3. It is to identify which transformation (stretch or compressions, reflection, and translation) change the attributes of the function.

The end behaviour of a graph is defined as what is going on at the ends of each graph, as the function approaches positive or negative infinitely, the leading term determines what the graph looks like as it moves towards infinity.

Therefore, all the transformation changes the attributes of the function.Transformation that changes end behavior are reflection, translation and stretch or compressions.

Transformation that changes end behavior are reflection, translation and stretch or compressions

Module 5 Chapter 5 Polynomial Functions Problems HMH.

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Module 5 Chapter 5 Exercise 5.1 Polynomial Functions Page 242 Problem 19 Answer

It is given a function, f(x)=x3. It is to identify which transformation (stretch or compressions, reflection, and translation) change the attributes of the function.

The location of the point of symmetry define position of point of symmetry. Transformation that changes location of the point of symmetry is translation.

The location of point of symmetry are transformed by translation.

Page 242 Problem 20 Answer

It is given a graph of f(x)=x3.

It is to identify which transformation (stretch or compressions, reflection, and translation) changes the attributes of the function.

Symmetry about a point defines the point at the same distance from the central point.

The transformations often preserve the original shape of the function.

Common types of transformations include rotations, translations, reflections, and scaling.

Assume two functions, f(x)=x3and   g(x)=x3+5 which is the translation of the graph of f by 5 units upwards.

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 5 Polynomial Functions 21 1

Now, it is evident from the graph that both graphs do not have symmetry. Therefore, this implies that when translation is done the function changes its symmetry.Similarly, consider two functions, f(x)=x3 and  h(x)=−x3.

Observe the graph of these functions.

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 5 Polynomial Functions 21

 

This is a special case where reflection is over the y axis, preserves the symmetry.Hence, the transformations that contribute in changing the symmetry about a point are reflection and translation.

The transformation that changes symmetry about a point is reflection and stretch or compressions.

Page 242 Problem 21 Answer

It is given graph f(x)=x3and g(x)=a(x−h)3+k.

It is to describe transformation on f(x) to obtain g(x).

Following transformation are made on f(x) that gives graph g(x).

First, a vertical stretch by a factor a unit, then translation of h unit to right and k unit to down.

Note that the translation of h unit to right affect only x coordinate whereas, vertical stretch by the factor a unit and translation of k unit to down affect only y coordinate of the point on the graph.

Therefore, the transformation is vertical stretch of the graph of f(x) by a units, followed by a translation of h units right, and k units down.

The transformation to transform f(x) to get the graph of g(x)=a (x−h)3+k is a vertical stretch of the graph of f(x) by a units, followed by a translation of h units right, and k units downwards.

Explain

Page 236 Exercise 1 Answer

It is given that g(x)=(2(x+3))3+4 and f(x)=x3.

It is required to identify the transformation of the graph f(x)=x3 by applying the transformation using the reference points and draw the graph of given g(x) on the same coordinate plane. It is also required to complete the table.

First, identify the transformation of the graphf(x)=x3. that produce the graph of the given function g(x) , then the graph g(x)on the same coordinate plane as the graph of f(x) by applying the transformation to the reference points (−1,−1),(0,0)and (1,1).

The graph of the transformation of f(x)=x3 , helps to consider the effect of the transformation on the three reference points on the graph of  f(x):(−1,−1),(0,0)  and (1,1) .

The table lists the three points and the corresponding points on the graph of g(x)=a(1/b(x−h))+k.

Notice that the point (0,0), which is the point of symmetry for the graph of f(x), is affected only by the parameters h and k .

The other two reference points are affected by all four parameters.

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 5 Polynomial Functions 1

Compare the given functiong(x)=(2(x+3))3+4 with the equation, g(x)=a(1/b(x−h))3+k.

Therefore, the value of k is 4, a is 1, b is 1/2, and his−3 .

now, fill the table according to these values.

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 5 Polynomial Functions 1 1

The graph of the given function g(x)=(2(x+3))3+4 on the same coordinate plane of f(x)=x3 by applying the transformation to the reference points (−1,−1),(0,0)and (1,1) is given below.

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 5 Polynomial Functions 1 2

The graph of the given function g(x)=(2(x+3))3+4 on the same coordinate plane as the graph off(x)=x3is shown below.

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 5 Polynomial Functions 1 3

The complete table is given below.

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 5 Polynomial Functions 1 4

Page 240 Exercise 2 Answer

It is given a steel ball bearing with a mass of 75  grams and a density of 7.82g/cm3.

It is required to estimate the radius of the steel ball.

To find the required answer graph the function using the calculated values then use the graph to obtain the indicated estimate.

Let r represent the radius of the ball bearing.

The volume V of the bell bearing is V(r)=mr3.

The mass in the ball bearing is m(r)=7.82.

Then ,V(r)=7.82r3.

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 5 Polynomial Functions 2

Draw the Graph of the function, V(r)=mr3.

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 5 Polynomial Functions 2 1

Recognize that the graph is vertical compression of the graph of the parent cubic function by a factor of 7.82.

Then draw the horizontal  linem=75 and estimate the value of r where the graph intersect.

The graph intersect where r≈2.1, so the radius of the steel ball bearing is about 2.1cm.

The estimated radius of the steel ball bearing is about 2.1cm with a mass of 75 grams and a density of 7.82g/cm3.

HMH Algebra 2 Chapter 5 Polynomial Functions Step-By-Step Solutions

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Module 5 Chapter 5 Exercise 5.1 Polynomial Functions Page 243 Exercise 3, Answer

It is given a cubic function of f(x)=x3

It is required  to graph the function and state the function’s domain and range

Algebra 2 Volume 11st EditionModule 5 Polynomial Functions 1

Observe that f(x)=x3 is can take all values lying between −∞ to ∞ Thus, the domain will be (−∞,∞)

When the function takes all values of its domain it gives values lying between −∞ to ∞

Thus, the range will be (−∞,∞)

Therefore, the domain and range of the function is (−∞,∞)

The domain and range of f(x)=x3 is(−∞,∞)

Page 243 Exercise 4, Answer

It is given a function f(x)=x3

It is required  to draw the graph of the function and identify the functions end behaviour

First graph the function by finding the ordered pairs by substituting the values of xas −2, −1, 0, 1, 2.

Then, plot the ordered pairs and join them through a curve to get a graph Then, observe the end behaviour of the function

Find the ordered pairs to plot the graphSubstitute the value of x as −2, −1, 0, 1, 2 simultaneously in y=x3

Algebra 2 Volume 11st EditionModule 5 Polynomial Functions 2

The ordered pairs will be points (−2,−8),(−1,−1),(0,0) (1,1) and (2,8)

Plot the order pairs

Algebra 2 Volume 11st EditionModule 5 Polynomial Functions 3

Draw a smooth curve on the obtained pair through the plotted points to obtain the graph f(x)=x3

Algebra 2 Volume 11st EditionModule 5 Polynomial Functions 4

From the graph it is clear that whenx→+∞, the function approaches its positive values Therefore, whenx→+∞, f(x)→+∞ Also, when x>0then, f(x)>0

Similarly, when x→−∞, the function approaches its negative values Therefore,  when x→−∞then, f(x)→−∞

The end behaviour of the function is  when x→+∞, f(x)→+∞and  x→−∞,f(x)→−∞

Page 243 Exercise 5, Answer

It is given the cubic function f(x)=x3

It is required to identify the graph’s x-intercept and y-interceptThe graph of f(x)=x3 inferred from part (b) is as follows

Algebra 2 Volume 11st EditionModule 5 Polynomial Functions 5

From the graph it is observed that the graph intersects at x-axis is (0,0) and the point where a line crosses the y-axis is also (0,0)

Therefore, x-intercept and the y-intercept is 0

The x-intercept and the y-intercept of the function f(x)=x3 is zero

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Module 5 Chapter 5 Exercise 5.1 Polynomial Functions Page 243 Exercise 6, Answer

It is given a cubic function f(x)=x3

It is required to graph the functionf(x)=x3 and identify the intervals where the functions has positive values and where it has negative values

The graph of f(x)=x3 inferred from part (b) is as follow

Algebra 2 Volume 11st EditionModule 5 Polynomial Functions 6

From the graph, it is observed that for the values of x greater than zero, the function has positive values and for the values of x less than zero, the function has negative values

Thus, the function has the positive values at the interval of (0,+∞) and the negative values at the interval of (−∞,0)

The function f(x)=x3 has the positive values at the interval of (0,+∞) and negative values at the interval of (−∞,0)

Page 243 Exercise 7, Answer

It is given a cubic function f(x)=x3

It is required to identify the intervals where the function is increasing and where it decreasing by using the drawn graph of f(x)=x3

The graph of f(x)=x3 inferred from part (b) is as follows

Algebra 2 Volume 11st EditionModule 5 Polynomial Functions 7

From the graph it is observed  that y=f(x)is increasing when value of x increasing but the value is never decreasing irrespective of x

Thus, the function f(x)=x3 is increasing when x>0 but it never decreasing

The function f(x)=x3 is increasing when x>0and decreasing at ϕ

Page 243 Exercise 8, Answer

It is given a cubic function f(x)=x3

It is required to explain whether the function is even ,odd or neither The graph of f(x)=x3 inferred from part (b) is as follows

Algebra 2 Volume 11st EditionModule 5 Polynomial Functions 8

The function is symmetric about the line y=x,so the function is an odd functionTherefore,  the function f(x)=x3 is an odd function

The function f(x)=x3 is an odd function as it is symmetric about the line y=x

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Module 5 Chapter 5 Exercise 5.1 Polynomial Functions Page 243 Exercise 9, Answer

It is given a cubic function f(x)=x3

It is required to explain about symmetry of the given functionIt is inferred from the part (f) that the function is oddThe graph off(x)=x3 inferred from part (b) is as follows

Algebra 2 Volume 11st EditionModule 5 Polynomial Functions 9

From the graph it is clearly shows that the graph is symmetric about the origin as it is an odd function and an odd function is always symmetric about origin

Thus, the function f(x)=x3 is symmetric about origin

The function f(x)=x3 is symmetric about the origin as it is an odd function

Algebra 2 Volume 11st EditionModule 5 Polynomial Functions 10

Page 243 Exercise 10, Answer

It is given graph that g(x)=(x−4)3

It is to describe how the graph of g(x) is related to the graph of f(x)=x3

Draw graphs for each of the functions separately using a graphing calculator

Then, do the appropriate transformation to make both functions equal graphically which proves given functions are related

The parent function is f(x)=x3 Using graphing calculator, draw the graph of the function f(x)=x3

Algebra 2 Volume 11st EditionModule 5 Polynomial Functions ex 2-1

The function, g(x)=(x−4)3 is of the form g(x)=(x−a)

Then, consider the fact that if a is a positive number then, the graph of g(x)=(x−a) occurs from the horizontal translation of the graph of f, a units to the right Here, the value of a is 4

So, translate the graph of f(x)=x3four units to the right

The graph of g(x)=(x−4)3 will be as follows:

Algebra 2 Volume 11st EditionModule 5 Polynomial Functions ex 2-2

The graph of g(x)=(x−4)3 is the translation of the graph of f(x)=x3 to 4 units to the right

Algebra 2 Volume 11st EditionModule 5 Polynomial Functions ex 2-3

Solutions For Chapter 5 Exercise 5.1 Polynomial Functions HMH

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Module 5 Chapter 5 Exercise 5.1 Polynomial Functions Page 243 Exercise 11, Answer

It is given graph that g(x)=−5x3

It is to describe how the graph of g(x) is related to the graph of f(x)=x3

Draw graphs for each of the functions separately using a graphing calculator

Then, do the appropriate transformation using the rules to plot the graph of h(x)=a(1b(x−h))3+kand plot the required graph

The parent function is f(x)=x3Using a graphing calculator, draw the graph of the function f(x)=x3

Algebra 2 Volume 11st EditionModule 5 Polynomial Functions ex 3-1

The given cubic function is of the form h(x)=a(1b(x−h))3+k

For g(x), h=0,k=0, b=−1, and a=5

Thus, according to the rule of the cubic function h(x),the graph of g(x)=−5x3 is  the reflection of f(x) in the y-axis followed by a vertical stretch of a factor of 5

Algebra 2 Volume 11st EditionModule 5 Polynomial Functions ex 3-2

The graph of g(x)=−5x3 is  the reflection off(x) in they-axis followed by a vertical stretch of a factor of 5

Page 243 Exercise 12, Answer

It is given that g(x)=x3+2

It is to describe how the graph of g(x)is related to the graph of f(x)=x3 Draw graphs for each of the functions separately using a graphing calculator

Then, do the appropriate transformation to make both functions equal graphically which proves given functions are related

The parent function is f(x)=x3

Using a graphing calculator, draw the graph of the function f(x)=x3

Algebra 2 Volume 11st EditionModule 5 Polynomial Functions ex 4-1

The function, g(x)=x3+2is of the form g(x)=f(x)+k

Then, consider the fact that if a is a positive number then, the graph of g(x)=f(x)+k occurs from the vertical translation of the graph of f, k units to the up Here, the value of k is 2

So, translate the graph of f(x)=x3 two units upwards

The graph of g(x)=(x−4)3 will be as follows:

Algebra 2 Volume 11st EditionModule 5 Polynomial Functions ex 4-2

The graph of g(x)=x3 +2 is the translation of the graph of  f(x)=x3 to 2 units upwards

Algebra 2 Volume 11st EditionModule 5 Polynomial Functions ex 4-3

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Module 5 Chapter 5 Exercise 5.1 Polynomial Functions Page 243 Exercise 13, Answer

It is given graph that g(x)=(3x)3

It is to describe how the graph of g(x) is related to the graph of f(x)=x3

Draw graphs for each of the functions separately using a graphing calculator

Then, do the appropriate transformation using the rules to plot the graph of h(x)=a(1b(x−h))3+k and plot the required graph

The parent function is f(x)=x3

Using a graphing calculator, draw the graph of the function f(x)=x3

Algebra 2 Volume 11st EditionModule 5 Polynomial Functions ex 5-1

The given cubic function is of the form h(x)=a(1b(x−h))3+k

For g(x), h=0,k=0, b=13, and a=1

Thus, according to the rule of the cubic function h(x),the graph of g(x)=(3x)3is formed by compressing f(x)horizontally by a factor of 3

The graph will be as follows:

Algebra 2 Volume 11st EditionModule 5 Polynomial Functions ex 5-2

The graph of g(x)=(3x)3 is obtained by compressing f(x) horizontally by a factor of 3

Algebra 2 Volume 11st EditionModule 5 Polynomial Functions ex 5-3

Page 244 Exercise 14, Answer

It is given graph that g(x)=(x+1)3

It is to describe how the graph of g(x) is related to the graph of f(x)=x3

Draw graphs for each of the functions separately using a graphing calculator

Then, do the appropriate transformation to make both functions equal graphically which proves given functions are related

The parent function is f(x)=x3

Using graphing calculator, draw the graph of the function (x)=x3

Algebra 2 Volume 11st EditionModule 5 Polynomial Functions ex 6-1

The function g f(x)=(x+1)3 is of the form g(x)=f(x+a)

Then, consider the fact that ifa is a positive number then, the graph of g(x)=f(x+a) from the horizontal translation of the graph off, a units to the left Here, the value of a is 1

So, translate the graph of f(x)=x3 one unit to the left

The graph of g(x)=(x+1)3 will be as follows:

Algebra 2 Volume 11st EditionModule 5 Polynomial Functions ex 6-2

The graph of g(x)=(x+1)3 is the translation of the graph of f(x)=x3 to 1 unit to the left

Algebra 2 Volume 11st EditionModule 5 Polynomial Functions ex 6-3

Page 244 Exercise 15, Answer

It is given that g(x)=x3−3

It is to describe how the graph of g(x) is related to the graph of f(x)=x3

Draw graphs for each of the functions separately using a graphing calculator

Then, do the appropriate transformation to make both functions equal graphically which proves given functions are related

The parent function is f(x)=x3 Using graphing calculator, draw the graph of the function f(x)=x3

Algebra 2 Volume 11st EditionModule 5 Polynomial Functions ex 8-1

The function, g(x)=x3 −3 is of the form g(x)=f(x)−k

Then, consider the fact that if a is a positive number then, the graph of g(x)=f(x)−k from the vertical translation of the graph of f, k units down Here, the value of k is 3So, translate the graph of f(x)=x3 three units down

The graph of g(x)=x3−3will be as follows:

Algebra 2 Volume 11st EditionModule 5 Polynomial Functions ex 8-2

The graph of g(x)=x3 −3 is the translation of the graph of  f(x)=x3 to 3 units down

Algebra 2 Volume 11st EditionModule 5 Polynomial Functions ex 8-3

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Module 5 Chapter 5 Exercise 5.1 Polynomial Functions Page 244 Exercise 16, Answer

It is given graph that g(x)=(−23x)3

It is to describe how the graph of g(x)is related to the graph of f(x)=x3

Draw graphs for each of the functions separately using a graphing calculator

Then, do the appropriate transformation using the rules to plot the graph of h(x)=a(1b(x−h))3+kand plot the required graph

The parent function isf(x)=x3 Using a graphing calculator, draw the graph of the function f(x)=x3

Algebra 2 Volume 11st EditionModule 5 Polynomial Functions ex 9-1

The given cubic function is of the form h(x)=a(1b(x−h))3+k

For g(x), h=0,k=0, b=32, and a=1

Thus, according to the rules of the cubic functionh(x),the graph of g(x)=(−23x)3is obtained by stretching f(x)horizontally by a factor of32, that is, 1.5

Algebra 2 Volume 11st EditionModule 5 Polynomial Functions ex 9-2

The horizontal stretching  of f(x)by 15units gives the graph of g(x)=(−23x)3

Algebra 2 Volume 11st EditionModule 5 Polynomial Functions ex 9-3

Page 244 Exercise 17, Answer

It is given that g(x)=(13x)3

It is required to identify the transformation that produces the graph of g(x)

when the parent function is f(x)=x3and then graph the function,g(x)using the reference points (−1,−1),(0,0), and(1,1)

Observe the type of g(x)then, Identify the transformation Now, make a table x and  y coordinates of function g(x), and plot the graph with the help of coordinates obtained

The given cubic function is of the form h(x)=a(1b(x−h))3+k

For g(x), h=0,k=0, b=3, and a=1

Thus, according to the rules to make the graph of the cubic function h(x), transform the graph of f(x) by horizontally stretching it by a factor of 3

Now, find the coordinates to plot g(x)=(13x)3

Algebra 2 Volume 11st EditionModule 5 Polynomial Functions ex 10-1

Graph both the function on the same plane

Algebra 2 Volume 11st EditionModule 5 Polynomial Functions ex 10-2

The transformation to graphg(x)=(13x)3using f(x)is horizontally stretchingf(x)by a factor of 3

Algebra 2 Volume 11st EditionModule 5 Polynomial Functions ex 10-3

Exercise 5.1 Polynomial Functions Worked Examples HMH Algebra 2

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Module 5 Chapter 5 Exercise 5.1 Polynomial Functions Page 244 Exercise 18, Answer

It is given graph that g(x)=1/3×3.

It is required to identify the transformation that produces the graph of g(x) when the parent function is f(x)=x3 and then graph the function, g(x) using the reference points (−1,−1) ,(0,0), and (1,1).

Observe the type of g(x) then, Identify the transformation. Now, make a table x and y coordinates of function g(x), and plot the graph with the help of coordinates obtained.

The parent function is f(x)=x3.

Using a graphing calculator, draw the graph of the function f(x)=x3.

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 5 Polynomial Functions 18

The given cubic function is of the form h(x)=a(1/b(x−h))3+k.

For g(x), h=0,k=0,b=1, and a=1/3.

Therefore, a<1. So, the graph will be compressed.

Thus, according to the rules of the cubic function h(x), the graph of g(x)=1/3x3 is the obtained by compressing f(x) vertically by a factor of 3.

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 5 Polynomial Functions 18 1

The vertical compression of f(x) by 3 units gives the graph of g(x)=1/4x3.

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 5 Polynomial Functions 18 2

Page 244 Exercise 19, Answer

It is given that the function f(x)=x3 is getting transformed to the function  g(x)=(x−4)3−3.

It is asked to identify the transformations then to draw the graph of the function by applying the transformations on the reference points (−1,−1), (0,0)and (1,1).

First, identify the transformations of the graph of f(x)=x3 that produces the graph of the function g(x), then draw the graph for function f(x).

Then apply those transformations in the reference points (−1,−1), (0,0)and (1,1), it will give the reference points for the new function g(x).

Plot those reference points and draw the smooth curve crossing over those points, the graph obtained will be the graph of the given function g(x).

The function f(x)=x3 is getting transformed to the function  g(x)=(x−4)3−3.

The given function is of the form, h(x)=a(1/b(x−h))3+k.

For g(x), h=0,k=0, b=1, and a=1.

The transformations of the graph of f(x) that produces the graph of g(x) are Horizontal translation to the right by 4 units.

Vertical shift to the down by 3 units.

Note that, the Horizontal translation to the right by 4 units will only affect the x-coordinate and the Vertical shift to the down by 3 units will only affect the y-coordinate.

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 5 Polynomial Functions 19

Now, plot the graph of the function f(x).

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 5 Polynomial Functions 19 1

Then, shift the function f(x) to the right by 4 units and then to the down by 3 units to obtain the function g(x)

The transformations of the graph of f(x) that produces the graph of g(x) are:

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 5 Polynomial Functions 19 2

Horizontal translation to the right by 4 units.

Vertical translation to the down by 3 units.

The graph of g(x) on the same coordinate plane as the graph of f(x) by applying the transformations to the reference points (−1,−1), (0,0) and(1,1) is given by,

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 5 Polynomial Functions 19 3

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Module 5 Chapter 5 Exercise 5.1 Polynomial Functions Page 244 Exercise 20, Answer

It is given that the function f(x)=x3 is getting transformed to the function g(x)=(x+1)3+2.

It is asked to identify the transformations then to draw the graph of the function by applying the transformations on the reference points (−1,−1)2,(0,0), and (1,1).

First, identify the transformations of the graph of f(x)=x3 that produces the graph of the function g(x), then draw the graph for function f(x).

Then apply those transformations in the reference points (−1,−1), (0,0), and (1,1), it will give the reference points for the new function g(x).

Plot those reference points and draw the smooth curve crossing over those points, the graph obtained will be the graph of the given function g(x).

The given function is of the form,h(x)=a(1/b(x−h))3+k.

For g(x), h=−1,k=2, b=1, and a=1.

The transformations of the graph of f(x) that produces the graph of g(x) are: Horizontal shifts to the left by 1 units.

Vertical shift to the upward by 2 units.

Note that, the Horizontal shifts to the left by 1 units will only affect the x-coordinate and the Vertical shift to the upward by 2 units will only affect the y-coordinate.

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 5 Polynomial Functions 20

Now, plot the graph of the function f(x).

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 5 Polynomial Functions 20 1

Then, shift the function f(x) to the left by 1 units and then to the upward by 2 units to obtain the function g(x).

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 5 Polynomial Functions 20 2

The transformations of the graph of f(x) that produces the graph of g(x) are: Horizontal shifts to the left by 1 units followed by vertical shift to the upward by 2 units.

The graph of g(x) on the same coordinate plane as the graph of f(x) by applying the transformations to the reference points (−1,−1), (0,0) and(1,1) is given by,

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 5 Polynomial Functions 20 3

Page 244 Exercise 21, Answer

It is given that g(x)=a(x−h)3+k is a general equation for a cubic function and a graph of a function is given with its reference points.

It is asked to write a specific equation by identifying the values of the parameters from the reference points shown in the graph.

First of all, find the point of symmetry, in that, the abscissa is the value of h and the value of ordinate is the value of k.

Then to find the value of a, plug the values of h and k in the parent function and use another reference point to solve the equation.

Finally, substitute all the obtained values in the general equation for the cubic function, that will be the required function for the given graph.

First, identify the point of symmetry from the graph.

(h,k)=(1,4)

Thus, h is equal to 1 and k is equal to 4.

Now, identify the value of a by substituting the values of h, k and using any of the reference point in the general equation.

Therefore, g(x)=a(x−h)3+k

Substituting 1 for h and 4 for k.

g(x)=a(x−1)3+4

Consider the references points (0,7) and substitute 0 for x and 7 for g(x).

​7=a(0−1)3 +4

7=a(−1)+4

7=−a+4

Subtract 4 from both the sides.

​7−4=−a+4−4

3=−a​

Multiply both sides by −1 and rewrite the equation for a.​​

3(−1)=−a(−1)

a=−3​

Thus, a is equal to −3.

Now, substitute all these values in the given general equation of the cubic functiong(x)=a(x−h)3+k.

Thus, g(x)=−3(x−3)3+4

Hence, the required equation for the given function is g(x)=−3(x−3)3+4.

The specific equation by identifying the values of the parameters from the reference points shown in the graph is given by g(x)=−3(x−3)3+4.

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Module 5 Chapter 5 Exercise 5.1 Polynomial Functions Page 244 Exercise 22, Answer

It is given that g(x)=(1/b(x−h))3+k is a general equation for a cubic function and a graph of a function is given with its reference points.

It is asked to write a specific equation by identifying the values of the parameters from the reference points shown in the graph.

First of all, find the point of symmetry, in that, the abscissa is the value of h and the value of ordinate is the value of k.

Then to find the value of b, plug the values of hand k in the parent function and use another reference point to solve the equation.

Finally, substitute all the obtained values in the general equation for the cubic function, that will be the required function for the given graph.

First identify the point of symmetry from the graph.

(h,k)=(2,−1)

Thus, h is equal to 2 and k is equal to −1.

Now, identify the value of b by substituting the values of h, k and using any of the reference point in the general equation.

Therefore, g(x)=(1/b(x−h))3+k

Substituting 2 for h and −1 for k.

g(x)=(1/b(x−2))3+(−1)

Consider the references points (1.5,0) and substitute 1.5 for x and 0 for g(x).​

​0=(1/b(1.5−2))3 +(−1)

0=(1/b(0.5))3−1

0=1/b3(0.5)3−1

0=0.125/b3−1

​Add 1 to both the sides.​

​0+1=0.125/b3

−1+1 /1=0.125/b3

Multiply both sides by b3.

​​1=0.125/b3

1⋅b3=0.125

b3⋅b3 b3=0.125

Take cube root of both the sides.

3√b3=3/√0.125

b=0.5​

Thus, b is equal to 0.5.

​Now, substitute all these values in the given general equation of the cubic function g(x)=(1

b (x−h))3+k.

Thus, ​g(x)=(1/0.5(x−2))3+(−1)

g(x)=(1/0.5(x−2))3−1​

Hence, the required equation for the given function is g(x)=(1/0.5(x−2))3−1.

The specific equation by identifying the values of the parameters from the reference points shown in the graph is given by g(x)=(1/0.5(x−2))3−1.

Page 244 Exercise 23, Answer

It is given that the density of gold is 0.019kg/cm3.

It is asked to estimate the edge length of a cube of gold with a mass of 1 kg by modeling a cubic function and graphing the function using calculated values of the function.

Consider the length as l, then find volume, mass of the gold. Then draw a graph using the mass function with plots mass vs. length.

From the graph, find the value in the X−axis which is the length of the cube of the gold, for mass equal to 1, that will be the required value.

Given that the density of gold is 0.019 kg/cm3.

Assume the length of the edge of the cube be l (in cm). Then, volume of the cube is given by,

V=l3cm3

Since density of the gold is given as 0.019kg/cm3

Therefore, mass of the cube is, ​

​m=Vd

m=0.019l3 kg

Now, make a table using the above function.

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 5 Polynomial Functions 18

Draw the graph of the mass function by plotting above points, and recognizing that the graph is a vertical compression of the graph of the parent cubic function by a factor of 0.019.

Then draw the horizontal line m=1 and estimate the value of l where the graph intersects.

Algebra 2, Volume 1, 1st Edition, Module 5 Polynomial Functions 18 1

This is given to be 1kg. Thus, 0.019x3=1

Divide both sides by 0.019.​

​0.019x3/0.019=1

0.019 x3 =1

0.019x3 =52.63

Take cube root of both the sides.​

​3 √x3 =3

√52.63

x=3.74 cm​

Hence, edge length of a cube of gold is 3.74 cm.

The edge length of a cube of gold is 3.74 cm.

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 Exercise 5.1 Walkthrough

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Module 5 Chapter 5 Exercise 5.1 Polynomial Functions Page 244 Exercise 24, Answer

It is given that a proposed design for a habitable Mars colony is a hemispherical biodome used to maintain a breathable atmosphere for the colonists.

It is asked to estimate the radius of the biodome if it is required to contain 5.5 billion cubic feet of air, by modeling a cubic function and graphing the function using calculated values of the function.

Consider the length as l, then find volume, mass of the gold. Then draw a graph using the mass function with plots mass vs. length.

From the graph, find the value in the X−axis which is the length of the cube of the gold, for mass equal to 1, that will be the required value.

Assume the radius of the hemispherical biodome ber (in foot).

Then, volume of the hemispherical biodome is given by,

V=2/3πr3 feet3

This is given to be 5.5 billion cubic feet.

Thus, 5.5=2/3πr3

Multiply both sides by 3/2π and simplify the equation.​

​5.5⋅3/2π=2

3/πr3⋅(3/2π) 2.62=r3

r3=2.62​

Take cube root on both the sides and simplify the equation.​

​3√r3=3√2.62

r=1.37

​Hence, radius of the biodome is 1.37 thousands of feet.

The radius of the hemispherical biodome is 1.37 thousands of feet.

HMH Algebra 2 Volume 1 1st Edition Module 5 Chapter 5 Exercise 5.1 Polynomial Functions Page 244 Exercise 25, Answer

It is given that the graph of the function f(x)=x3 is been stretched.

It is asked to explain that how horizontally stretching the graph of the function by a factor b can be equivalent to vertically compressing the graph of the same function by a factor a.

Since, a horizontal stretching by a factor can be accomplished by the graph of,​

​f(x)=(1/bx)3

f(x)=1/b3x3

​Thus, horizontal stretching by a factor of b is equivalent to the vertical compression by a factor of b3.

Page 248 Exercise 26 Answer

It is given that Julio wants to purchase a spherical aquarium and fill it with salt water, which has an average density of 1027g/cm3

Also, he has found a company that sells four sizes of spherical aquariums whose size and diameter is represented by the table

Algebra 2 Volume 11st EditionModule 5 Polynomial Functions L-1
It is required to find that if the stand for Julio’s aquarium will support a maximum of 50kg , what is the largest size tank that he should buy

To find the required answer find the volume with the density of 1027g/cm3 and mass of 50kg by the equation d=m/v

Then, equate the obtained volume with 43πr3and find the radius Double the radius to get the diameter then choose the appropriate size according as the obtain diameter

The density of the salt water is 1.027g/cm3

The aquarium will support a maximum of 50kg or

50×1000=50000g

The formula of volume in terms of density is v=m/d

v=500001027=48685

Thus, the volume is 486855cm3

Equate the obtained volume with the formula of volume of a sphere4

3πr3 to find the radius

4/3πr3

=486855

Multiply both side with 3/4

​πr3

=486855×3/4

​​​​​​​​=36514125

Since π=22/7

so multiply both side with722

227×722×r3

=36514125×722r3

=1161813r3
=(2264)3

​Thus, the value of ris 2264

Find the diameter

Multiply the radius obtained by 2

​Diameter=2254×2

=4528 cm

≈45 cm

Now, on comparing the obtained diameter with the given diameter according as the size of aquarium, the largest size tank is the large size of 45 cm diameter that should be buy

The largest size tank that he should buy should have 45 cm diameter

Page 248 Exercise 27, Answer

It is given that Julio wants to purchase a spherical aquarium and fill it with salt water, which has an average density of 1027g/cm3

Also, he has found a company that sells four sizes of spherical aquariums whose size and diameter is represented by the table is inferred from part (a) that he should buy is the large size of 45 cm diameter if the stand for Julio’s aquarium will support a maximum of 50kg with the density of 1027g/cm3

Algebra 2 Volume 11st EditionModule 5 Polynomial Functions L-2

It is required to find whether the suggestion of friend is correct or not Julio’s friend suggests that he can buy a larger tank if he uses fresh water, which has a density of 10 g/cm3

It To find the required answer find the volume with the density of 10 g/cm3 and mass of 50kg by the equation d=mv

Then equal the obtain volume with 4/3πr3and find the radius Twice the obtain radius to get the diameter then choose the appropriate size according as the obtain diameter

Then compare the obtain diameter for both the density 1027g/cm3 and 10 g/cm3to fin the suggestion of Julio’s friend is logical or not

The density of the water is 10 g/cm3

Aquarium will support a maximum of 50kg or50×1000=50000 g

The formula of volume in terms of density is v=md

Substitute m as 50000 g and d as 10 g/cm3

v=5000010=50000 cm3

Thus, the volume is 50000 cm3

Equate the obtained volume with the formula of volume of a sphere 43πr3to find the radius

43πr3=50000

Multiply both side with 3/4 and substitute π=22/7​πr3

=50000×3/4

=37500

​Multiply both sides by 7/22​

227×7

22×r3

=37500×7

22r3=1193181r=(2285)3

Find the diameter

Multiply the radius obtained by 2​

​Diameter=2285×2

=457 cm

The diameter of the tank is 457 cm when fresh water is used

Observe that the diameter of the largest tank Julio could buy is 45 cm

Thus, when freshwater has used the diameter of the Tank is slightly greater Therefore, the suggestion of the friend is correct

The suggestion made by the friend that Julio could buy a larger tank if he uses freshwater of density 10 g/cm3is correct because the diameter of the tank when freshwater is used is 457 whereas the tank he bought earlier was of 45 cm diameter

Go Math Grade 6 Exercise 8.3: Understanding Percents Solutions

Go Math! Practice Fluency Workbook Grade 6 California 1st Edition Chapter 8 Percents

Page 53 Problem 1 Answer

Here the value is 22. Total number of students is 55.

Go Math! Practice Fluency Workbook Grade 6, California 1st Edition, Chapter 8 Percents 1

22 students is 40% of 55.

Page 53 Problem 2 Answer

Go Math! Practice Fluency Workbook Grade 6, California 1st Edition, Chapter 8 Percents 2

red marbles is 40% of 60 marbles

Page 53 Problem 3 Answer

Go Math! Practice Fluency Workbook Grade 6, California 1st Edition, Chapter 8 Percents 3

15% of $9 is $1.35.

Go Math! Practice Fluency Workbook Grade 6 Chapter 8 Percents Exercise 8.3 Answer Key

Page 53 Problem 4 Answer

Go Math! Practice Fluency Workbook Grade 6, California 1st Edition, Chapter 8 Percents 4

12 is 6% of 200.

Go Math Grade 6 Exercise 8.3 Understanding Percents Solutions

Go Math Grade 6 Exercise 8.3: Understanding Percents Solutions  Page 53 Problem 5 Answer

Total number of messages Bethany sent is 60.

Percentage of messages she sent to her best friend is 15%.

The number of text messages Bethany sent to her best friend is 9.

Given, Bethany sent 60 text messages out of which 15% of messages were sent to her best friend.

Go Math! Practice Fluency Workbook Grade 6, California 1st Edition, Chapter 8 Percents 5

Then the number of messages Bethany sent to her best friend is 9.

Page 53 Problem 6 Answer

Given: 27% of the people in a survey chose salads over a meat dish.

81 people chose salads.To find: the number of people in the survey

summary: Write the equation to find the percentage. Substitute the given values. Solve for the unknown.

Given that 27% of people in the survey chose salads over a meat dish.

Go Math! Practice Fluency Workbook Grade 6, California 1st Edition, Chapter 8 Percents 6

The number of people who chose salad over meat dish is 81, the value of the part in the equation.

Substitute these values in the equation for percentage.

If the percentage and the number of people in a survey who chose salad over a meat fish are 27% and 81 respectively, then the total number of people in the survey is 300.

Page 53 Problem 7 Answer

Given: The sales tax on a $350 computer is $22.75.

To find: The sales tax rate. Summary: Given the part and the total. Substitute the values in the equation for percentage.

Simplify and find the percentage. Given the cost of the computer is $350.

Go Math! Practice Fluency Workbook Grade 6, California 1st Edition, Chapter 8 Percents 7

The sale tax on it is $22.75. Substitute these values in the equation to If the sales tax on a computer of cost $350 is $22.75, then the sales tax rate of the product is 6.5%.

Go Math Grade 6 Exercise 8.3: Understanding Percents Solutions Page 53 Problem 8 Answer

Given: The circle graph

Go Math! Practice Fluency Workbook Grade 6, California 1st Edition, Chapter 8 Percents 8 1

To find: The number of voters of age 18−29 if the total number of voters is 6000.

Summary: Identify the percentage of the given age group from the figure. Substitute the value and the total in the equation for the percentage.

Solve for the unknown. The percentage of voters of age 18−29 is 10%.

The total number of people who voted for the election is 6000.

Substitute these values in the equation for percentage and solve.

The figure below shows the age group and the percentage of voters.

Go Math! Practice Fluency Workbook Grade 6, California 1st Edition, Chapter 8 Percents 8 2

If the total number of voters is 6000, the number of voters of age 18−29 is 600.

Page 53 Problem 9 Answer

Given: The cycle graph,

Go Math! Practice Fluency Workbook Grade 6, California 1st Edition, Chapter 8 Percents 9 1

To find: If the total number of voters is 12,000, find the number of voters of age 50−64.

Summary: Identify the percentage of age group voters from the figure and the total. Substitute the values in the equation and solve.

Given the total number of voters is 12,000. The percentage of voters of age 50−64 is 35%.

percentage=value/total×100

value=percentage×total/100

​Substituting the values, we get, ​value=35×12000/100 = 4200; which is the number of voters of the age 50−64.

The circle graph is given below,

Go Math! Practice Fluency Workbook Grade 6, California 1st Edition, Chapter 8 Percents 9 2

If the total number of voters is 12,000 the number of voters of age 50−64 is 4200.

Page 53 Problem 10 Answer

Given: The circle graph is

Go Math! Practice Fluency Workbook Grade 6, California 1st Edition, Chapter 8 Percents 10 1

To find: The number of voters of age over 65 if the total number of voters is 596.

Summary: Find the percentage of voters of the given age group from the figure and the total is also given. Substitute the values in the equation and solve.

The total number of voters is 596. The percentage of voters of age over 60=25%

​Percentage=value/total×100

value=percentage×total/100

​Substitute the values in the equation, ​value=25×596/100=149; which is the number of voters of age over 60.

The circle graph is given below, If the total number of voters is 596, then the number of voters of age over 60 is 149.

Go Math! Practice Fluency Workbook Grade 6, California 1st Edition, Chapter 8 Percents 10 2

Page 53 Problem 11 Answer

From the below given circle graph,

Go Math! Practice Fluency Workbook Grade 6, California 1st Edition, Chapter 8 Percents 11 1

The percentage of voters of age 18−29=10%.

The percentage of voters of age 30−49=30%.

The number of people of age group 18−29 who voted is 45.

The percentage of voters of age 30−49 is three tomes the percentage of voters of age 18−29.

So in order to find the number of people of age 30−49 who voted, we need to multiply the number of people of age 18−29 who voted with three.

That is, 45×3=135. This is how Sahil calculated the answer, and he is correct.

Given the circle graph,

Go Math! Practice Fluency Workbook Grade 6, California 1st Edition, Chapter 8 Percents 11 2

Knowing that the number of people of age 18−29 who voted is 45, Sahil said the number of people of age 30−49 who voted is 135.

He is correct. He did it by multiplying three to the number just like their percentages are got

Go Math Grade 6 Exercise 8.3 Understanding Percents Answers

Go Math Grade 6 Exercise 8.3: Understanding Percents Solutions Page 54 Exercise 1 Answer

Here the value is 14. If 14 is some percent of 25, then 14 is the part.

In the problem to find what percentage of 25 is 14, the part is 14.

Page 54 Exercise 2 Answer

In the question statement, ” What percent of 25 is 14″, The part or the value is 14 The total is 25.

In the problem statement, “what percent of 25 is 14”, the total is 25.

Page 54 Exercise 3 Answer

Given: Some percent of 25 is 14

To find: Percentage of 14 part of 25

By using the formula, first, we divide 14 by 25 and then multiply it by 100 to get the percentage.

Divide 14 by 25,

=14/25

=0.56

Multiply it by 100,

=0.56⋅100

=56%

In a statement, what percent of 25 is 14. We got the percentage which is, 56%

Page 54 Exercise 4 Answer

Given: __% of 25 is 14

To find: Write and solve the equation.

We put 56 % in the fill-in-the-blank and solve the equation.

We put 56% in the fill-in-the-blank,

=56 %of 25is 14We check,

=56% of 25

=56/100 ⋅25

=0.56⋅25

=14

We solved 56% of 25 is 14.

Page 54 Exercise 5 Answer

Given: 80% of some number is 16

To write what is the part. If 80% of some number is 16, then 16 is the part.

In the problem to find 80 percentage of some number is 16, the part is 16.

Page 54 Exercise 6 Answer

Given: 80% of some number is 16

To find :The total number whose 80% is 16

By using the formula, we divide the 16 by 80% to get the total number.

Go Math! Practice Fluency Workbook Grade 6, California 1st Edition, Chapter 8 Percents e6

In the statement, 80% of what number is 16, what number or total came as 20.

Go Math Grade 6 Exercise 8.3: Understanding Percents Solutions Page 54 Exercise 7 Answer

Given: 80% of some number is 16

We need to write the percent In the statement, 80% of some number is 16, 80 is the percentage.

In the given statement of question , 80 is the percentage.

Page 54 Exercise 8 Answer

Given:80% of ___ is 16

To find: Write and solve the equation.

We put 20 in the fill-in-the-blank and solve it.

Given,80% of _______ is 16.

We put 20 in the fill-in-the-blank, = 80% of 20 is 16 We check,

=80 % of 20

=0.8⋅20

=16

Page 54 Exercise 9 Answer

Given that What percent of 20 is 11

As we have all the required values we need, Now we can put them in a simple mathematical formula as below

What percent of 20 is 11, just enter 11÷20×100 and you will get your answer which is55

Y=11/20×100/100=55/100

Percentage Calculator:11 is what percent of 20=55.

Page 54 Exercise 10 Answer

Given that 18 is 45 of what number?

As we have all the required values we need, Now we can put them in a simple mathematical formula as below:

You can easily calculate 18 is 45 percent of what number by, simply enter 18×100÷45 and you will get your answer which is 40

Solutions For Go Math Grade 6 Exercise 8.3 Understanding Percents

Go Math Grade 6 Exercise 8.3: Understanding Percents Solutions Page 54 Exercise 11 Answer

Given that 15 is what percent of 5

By simply dividing equation 1 by equation 2 and taking note of the fact that both the LHS (left-hand side) of both equations have the same unit percent we have 5 is what percent of 15=33.33

Page 54 Exercise 12 Answer

Given that 75 of what number is 105/75 of 140 is105.

You can prove this easily, divide 105 by 75 to find 1 percent (1.4) then simply multiply by100

Percentage: What is 75

percent of 105=78.75

Go Math Grade 6 Understanding Percents Exercise 8.3 Key

Go Math Answer Key

 

Go Math Grade 6 Exercise 8.2: Understanding Percents Solutions

Go Math! Practice Fluency Workbook Grade 6 California 1st Edition Chapter 8 Percents

Page 51 Problem 1 Answer

Given: The percent was given as 0.17

Find: Here, Write each decimal as a percent.

Solution: To convert a decimal to a percent, move the decimal point two places to the right and then write the % symbol after the number.

Therefore: 0.17=17%

The result of converting a decimal to a percent,17%

Page 51 Problem 2 Answer

The given decimal number is 0.56 .We have to write the given decimal number in percentage form.

Multiply by 100 to convert a number from decimal to percent then add a percent sign %.

We have to multiply the given decimal number by 100 to convert it into percent and then add the percent sign.

​⇒0.56×100=56/100×100=56%

0.56 is written as 56%.

Go Math Grade 6 Exercise 8.2: Understanding Percents Solutions Page 51 Problem 3 Answer

The given decimal number is 0.04. We have to write the given decimal number in percentage form.

Multiply by 100 to convert a number from decimal to percent then add a percent sign %.

We have to multiply the given decimal number by 100 to convert it into percent and then add the percent sign.

⇒0.04×100=4/100×100=4%

​0.04 is written as 4%.

Go Math! Practice Fluency Workbook Grade 6 Chapter 8 Percents Exercise 8.2 Answer Key

Go Math Grade 6 Exercise 8.2 Understanding Percents Answers

Page 51 Problem 4 Answer

The given decimal number is 0.7.We have to write the given decimal number in percentage form.

Multiply by 100 to convert a number from decimal to percent then add a percent sign %.

We have to multiply the given decimal number by 100 to convert it into percent and then add the percent sign.

​⇒0.7×100=7/10×100 = 70%​.

0.7 is written as 70%.

Page 51 Problem 5 Answer

The given decimal number is 0.025. We have to write the given decimal number in percentage form.

Multiply by 100 to convert a number from decimal to percent then add a percent sign %.

We have to multiply the given decimal number by 100 to convert it into percent and then add the percent sign.

​⇒0.025×100=25/1000×100

=25/10

=2.5%

0.025 is written as 2.5%.

Go Math Grade 6 Exercise 8.2: Understanding Percents Solutions Page 51 Problem 6 Answer

The given decimal number is 0.803. We have to write the given decimal number in percentage form.

Multiply by 100 to convert a number from decimal to percent then add a percent sign %.

We have to multiply the given decimal number by 100 to convert it into percent and then add the percent sign.

⇒0.803×100=803/1000×100=803/10=80.3%

0.803 is written as 80.3%.

Page 51 Problem 7 Answer

The given decimal number is 1.3. We have to write the given decimal number in percentage form.

Multiply by 100 to convert a number from decimal to percent then add a percent sign %.

We have to multiply the given decimal number by 100 to convert it into percent and then add the percent sign.

​⇒1.3×100 = 13/10×100.

=13×10

=130%

1.3 is written as 130%.

Page 51 Problem 8 Answer

The given decimal number is 2.10. We have to write the given decimal number in percentage form.

Multiply by 100 to convert a number from decimal to percent then add a percent sign %.

We have to multiply the given decimal number by 100 to convert it into percent and then add the percent sign.

​⇒2.1×100=21/10×100

=21×10

=210%

2.1 is written as 210%.

Solutions For Go Math Grade 6 Exercise 8.2 Understanding Percents

Go Math Grade 6 Exercise 8.2: Understanding Percents Solutions Page 51 Problem 9 Answer

The given fraction is 13/50. We have to write the given decimal number in percentage form.

Multiply by 100 to convert a fraction to percent then add a percent sign %.

We have to multiply the given fraction by 100 to convert it into percent and then add the percent sign.

​⇒13/50×100=13×2

=26%

13/50 is written as 26%.

Page 51 Problem 10 Answer

The given fraction is 3/5. We have to write the given decimal number in percentage form.

Multiply by 100 to convert a fraction to percent then add a percent sign %.

We have to multiply the given fraction by 100 to convert it into percent and then add the percent sign.

⇒3/5×100=3×20

=60%

3/5 is written as 60%.

Page 51 Problem 11 Answer

The given fraction is 3/20. We have to write the given decimal number in percentage form.

Multiply by 100 to convert a fraction to percent then add a percent sign %.

We have to multiply the given fraction by 100 to convert it into percent and then add the percent sign.

​⇒3/20×100=3×5

=15%

3/20 is written as 15%.

Go Math Grade 6 Exercise 8.2: Understanding Percents Solutions Page 51 Problem 12 Answer

The given fraction is 127/100.We have to write the given decimal number in percentage form.

Multiply by 100 to convert a fraction to percent then add a percent sign %.

We have to multiply the given fraction by 100 to convert it into percent and then add the percent sign.

⇒127/100×100=127%.

127/100 is written as 127%.

Page 51 Problem 13 Answer

The given fraction is 5/8. We have to write the given decimal number in percentage form.

Multiply by 100 to convert a fraction to percent then add a percent sign %.

We have to multiply the given fraction by 100 to convert it into percent and then add the percent sign.

​⇒5/8×100

=0.625×100

=62.5%

5/8 is written as 62.5%.

Page 51 Problem 14 Answer

The given fraction is 45/90. We have to write the given decimal number in percentage form.

Multiply by 100 to convert a fraction to percent then add a percent sign %.

We have to multiply the given fraction by 100 to convert it into percent and then add the percent sign.

​⇒45/90×100

=45/9×10

=5×10

=50%

45/90 is written as 50%.

Go Math Grade 6 Understanding Percents Exercise 8.2 Key

Go Math Grade 6 Exercise 8.2: Understanding Percents Solutions Page 51 Problem 15 Answer

The given fraction is 7/5. We have to write the given decimal number in percentage form.

Multiply by 100 to convert a fraction to percent then add a percent sign %.

We have to multiply the given fraction by 100 to convert it into percent and then add the percent sign.

​⇒7/5×100

=7×20

=140%

7/5 is written as 140%.

Page 51 Problem 16 Answer

The given fraction is 19/25. We have to write the given decimal number in percentage form.

Multiply by 100 to convert a fraction to percent then add a percent sign %.

We have to multiply the given fraction by 100 to convert it into percent and then add the percent sign.

​⇒19/25×100

=19×4

=76%

19/25 is written as 76%.

Go Math Grade 6 Exercise 8.2: Understanding Percents Solutions Page 51 Problem 17 Answer

Three numbers are given: 0.3,19/50,22%. We have to arrange the given numbers in increasing order.

We can convert all the given numbers either as fractions or decimal numbers or as a percent.

The given first number is 0.3. To convert the decimal number in percent, we have to multiply it by 100 and then add percent sign, “%”.

​⇒0.3×100

=3/10×100

=3×10

=30%

So, 0.3 is 30%.

The second given number is 19/50.

To convert the fraction in percent, we have to multiply it by 100 and then add percent sign, “%”.

​⇒19/50×100

=19×2

=38%.

So, 19/50 is 38%.

The given third number is 22% which is already a percent. Now, on comparing all the three percents, we get

∴38%>30%>22%.

⇒19/50>0.3>22%.

The final order of the numbers from the least to greatest is 22%<0.3<19/50.

Page 51 Problem 18 Answer

Three numbers are given: 11%,1/8,2/25. We have to arrange the given numbers in increasing order.

We can convert all the given numbers either as fractions or decimal numbers or as a percent.

The given first number 11% is already a percent. So, we have to convert the remaining two fractions, 1/8&2/25 to percent now.

∴To convert the fraction in percent, we have to multiply it by 100 and then add percent sign, “%”.

⇒1/8×100

=25/2%

=12.5%

and ​2/25×100

=2×4

=8%.

Now, on comparing all the three percents, we get

∴8%<11%<12.5%,

⇒2/25<11%<1/8.

Page 51 Problem 19 Answer

Three numbers are given: 5/8,0.675,5%.

We have to arrange the given numbers in increasing order.We can convert all the given numbers either as fractions or decimal numbers or as a percent.

The first given number is 5/8. To convert the fraction in percent, we have to multiply it by 100 and then add the percent sign, “%”.

⇒5/8×100

=5×12.5

=62.5%.

So, 5/8 is 62.5%.

The given second number is 0.675. To convert the decimal number in percent, we have to multiply it by 100 and then add the percent sign, “%”.

​⇒0.675×100

=675/1000×100

=675/10%

=67.5%.

So, 0.675 is 67.5%.

The given third number is 5% which is already a percent. Now, on comparing all the three percents, we get

∴5%<62.5%<67.5%,

⇒5%<5/8<0.675.

The final order of the numbers from the least to greatest is 5%<5/8<0.675.

Go Math Grade 6 Exercise 8.2: Understanding Percents Solutions Page 51 Problem 20 Answer

Three numbers are given: 1.25,0.51,250% . We have to arrange the given numbers in increasing order.

We can convert all the given numbers either as fractions or decimal numbers or as a percent.

The first two given numbers are 1.25&0.51 which are decimal numbers.

To convert the decimal number into percent, we have to multiply it by 100 and then add the percent sign, “%”.

⇒1.25×100

=125/100×100

=125%

and

⇒0.51×100

=51/100×100

=51%.

The given third number is 250% which is already a percent. Now, on comparing all the three percents, we get

∴51%<125%<250%,

⇒0.51<1.25<250%.

The final order of the numbers from the least to greatest is 0.51<1.25<250%.

Page 51 Problem 21 Answer

Three numbers are given: 350/100,0.351,27%. We have to arrange the given numbers in increasing order.

We can convert all the given numbers either as fractions or decimal numbers or as percent.

The first given number is 350/100.

To convert the fraction in percent, we have to multiply it by 100 and then add the percent sign, “%”.

⇒350/100×100=350%

So, 350/100 is 350%.

The given second number is 0.351.

To convert the decimal number into percent, we have to multiply it by 100 and then add the percent sign, “%”.

⇒0.351×100

=351/1000×100

=351/10%

=35.1%.

So, 0.351/ is 35.1%.

The given third number is 27% which is already a percent. Now, on comparing all the three percents, we get

∴27%<35.1%<350%,

⇒27%<0.351<350/100.

The final order of the numbers from the least to greatest is 27%<0.351<350/100.

Page 51 Problem 22 Answer

Given: – There are three given numbers 4/8,0.05,51%. We have to order these number from the least to greatest.

We can order the numbers by simplifying the fractions and percentages until it becomes a number with a decimal point which makes comparison easier.

Simplifying the first fraction 4/8
=2⋅2/2⋅2⋅2

=1/2

=0.5

The second number is already in its decimal representation. There is no further simplification possible.

The third number is in its percentage form. Using the definition of percentage, we can express the number as 51%=51/100

=0.51

Now, comparing the three numbers, we have 0.51>0.5>0.05

This implies 51%>4/8>0.05

The final order of the numbers from the least to greatest is 0.05<4/8<51%.

Go Math Grade 6 Exercise 8.2: Understanding Percents Solutions Page 51 Problem 23 Answer

Given: – During one hour, 6 out of 25 cars were travelling above the speed limit.

We have to find what percent of the cars were traveling above the speed limit.

Multiplying the numerator and denominator with a number that can make the denominator equal to 100.

The corresponding numerator is the required percentage.

The fraction form for the cars travelling above the speed limit is 6/25.

Multiplying the numerator and denominator with 4, we get

=6⋅4/25⋅4

=24/100

The numerator of the fraction with denominator 100 is the required percentage. 6/25=24%

The percentage of the cars that were travelling above the speed limit is 24%.

Page 51 Problem 24 Answer

Given: – At Oaknoll School, 90 out of 270 students own computers.

We have to find the percentage of students who do not own computers.

Multiplying the numerator and denominator with a number that can make the denominator equal to 100.

The corresponding numerator is the required percentage.

The number of students who do not use computers is 270−90=180.

The fraction form for the number of students who don’t use the computers is 180/270.

Simplifying the fraction, we get 90⋅2/90⋅3=2/3

The numerator of the fraction with denominator 100 is the required percentage. After rounding off to the nearest tenth, the percentage will be 2/3=66.7%

Go Math! Practice Fluency Workbook Grade 6, California 1st Edition, Chapter 8 Percents 24

The percent of students at Oaknoll School that do not own computers (rounded to the nearest tenth) is 66.7%.

Page 52 Exercise 1 Answer

Given: – The given number in decimal form is 0.34.

We have to find the percentage form of this decimal.

By appropriately shifting the decimal point, we can express a decimal in its percentage form.

The given number has its decimal point in between 0 and 3.

After shifting the decimal point two places to the right, the number becomes 034.0

Now adding the percentage symbol, the final value in percentage form is 34%.

Writing the decimal as a percent, we get 34%.

Page 52 Exercise 2 Answer

Given: – The given number in decimal form is 0.06.

We have to find the percentage form of this decimal.

By appropriately shifting the decimal point, we can express a decimal in its percentage form.

The given number has its decimal point in between 0 and 0.

After shifting the decimal point two places to the right, the number becomes 006.0 (or) 6.

Now adding the percentage symbol, the final value in percentage form is 6%.

Writing the decimal as a percent, we get 6%.

Detailed Solutions For Go Math Grade 6 Exercise 8.2 Understanding Percents

Go Math Grade 6 Exercise 8.2: Understanding Percents Solutions Page 52 Exercise 3 Answer

Given: – The given number in decimal form is 0.93.

We have to find the percentage form of this decimal.

By appropriately shifting the decimal point, we can express a decimal in its percentage form.

The given number has its decimal point in between 0 and 9.

After shifting the decimal point two places to the right, the number becomes 093.0 (or) 93.

Now adding the percentage symbol, the final value in percentage form is 93%.

Writing the decimal as a percent, we get 93%.

Page 52 Exercise 4 Answer

Given: – The given number in decimal form is 0.57.

We have to find the percentage form of this decimal.

By appropriately shifting the decimal point, we can express a decimal in its percentage form.

The given number has its decimal point in between 0 and 5.

After shifting the decimal point two places to the right, the number becomes 057.0 (or) 57.

Now adding the percentage symbol, the final value in percentage form is 57 %.

Writing the decimal as a percent, we get 57%.

Page 52 Exercise 5 Answer

Given: – The given number in decimal form is 0.8.

We have to find the percentage form of this decimal.

By appropriately shifting the decimal point, we can express a decimal in its percentage form.

The given number has its decimal point in between 0 and 8.

After shifting the decimal point two places to the right, the number becomes 080.0 (or) 80.

Now adding the percentage symbol, the final value in percentage form is 80%.

Writing the decimal as a percent, we get 80%.

Go Math Grade 6 Exercise 8.2: Understanding Percents Solutions Page 52 Exercise 6 Answer

Given: – The given number in decimal form is 0.734.

We have to find the percentage form of this decimal.

By appropriately shifting the decimal point, we can express a decimal in its percentage form.

The given number has its decimal point in between 0 and 7.

After shifting the decimal point two places to the right, the number becomes 073.4 (or) 73.4.

Now adding the percentage symbol, the final value in percentage form is 73.4 %.

Writing the decimal as a percent, we get 73.4%.

Page 52 Exercise 7 Answer

Given: – The given number in decimal form is 0.082.

We have to find the percentage form of this decimal.

By appropriately shifting the decimal point, we can express a decimal in its percentage form.

The given number has its decimal point in between 0 and 0.

After shifting the decimal point two places to the right, the number becomes 008.2 (or) 8.2.

Now adding the percentage symbol, the final value in percentage form is 8.2%

Writing the decimal as a percent, we get 8.2%.

Page 52 Exercise 8 Answer

Given: – The given number in decimal form is 0.225.

We have to find the percentage form of this decimal.

By appropriately shifting the decimal point, we can express a decimal in its percentage form.

The given number has its decimal point in between 0 and 2.

After shifting the decimal point two places to the right, the number becomes 022.5 (or) 22.5.

Now adding the percentage symbol, the final value in percentage form is 22.5%

Writing the decimal as a percent, we get 22.5%.

Go Math Grade 6 Exercise 8.2: Understanding Percents Solutions Page 52 Exercise 9 Answer

Given: – The given number in decimal form is 0.604.

We have to find the percentage form of this decimal.

By appropriately shifting the decimal point, we can express a decimal in its percentage form.

The given number has its decimal point in between 0 and 6.

After shifting the decimal point two places to the right, the number becomes 060.4 (or) 60.4.

Now adding the percentage symbol, the final value in percentage form is 60.4%.

Writing the decimal as a percent, we get 60.4%.

Page 52 Exercise 10 Answer

Given: – The given number in decimal form is 0.09.

We have to find the percentage form of this decimal.

By appropriately shifting the decimal point, we can express a decimal in its percentage form.

The given number has its decimal point in between 0 and 0.

After shifting the decimal point two places to the right, the number becomes 009.0 (or) 9.

Now adding the percentage symbol, the final value in percentage form is 9%.

Writing the decimal as a percent, we get 9%.

Page 52 Exercise 11 Answer

Given: – The given number in decimal form is 0.518.

We have to find the percentage form of this decimal.

By appropriately shifting the decimal point, we can express a decimal in its percentage form.

The given number has its decimal point in between 0 and 5.

After shifting the decimal point two places to the right, the number becomes 051.8 (or) 51.8.

Now adding the percentage symbol, the final value in percentage form is 51.8 %.

Writing the decimal as a percent, we get 51.8%.

Page 52 Exercise 12 Answer

Given: – The given number in decimal form is 1.03.

We have to find the percentage form of this decimal.

By appropriately shifting the decimal point, we can express a decimal in its percentage form.

The given number has its decimal point in between 1 and 0.

After shifting the decimal point two places to the right, the number becomes 103.0 (or) 103.

Now adding the percentage symbol, the final value in percentage form is 103%.

Writing the decimal as a percent, we get 103%.

Go Math Grade 6 Exercise 8.2: Understanding Percents Solutions Page 52 Exercise 13 Answer

Given: – The given fraction is 3/10.

We have to express the fraction as a percentage.

Multiplying the numerator and denominator with a number that can make the denominator equal to 100.

The corresponding numerator is the required percentage.

Multiply the numerator and the denominator with 10.

3⋅10/10⋅10=30/100

The numerator of the fraction with denominator 100 is the required percentage.

3/10=30%

Writing the fraction as a percent, we get 30%.

Page 52 Exercise 14 Answer

Given: – The given fraction is 2/50.

We have to express the fraction as a percentage.

Multiplying the numerator and denominator with a number that can make the denominator equal to 100.

The corresponding numerator is the required percentage.

Multiply the numerator and denominator with 2.

2⋅2/50⋅2=4/100

The numerator of the fraction with denominator 100 is the required percentage.

4/100=4%

Writing the fraction as a percentage, we get 4%.

Page 52 Exercise 15 Answer

Given: – The given fraction is 7/20.

We have to express the fraction as a percentage.

Multiplying the numerator and denominator with a number that can make the denominator equal to 100.

The corresponding numerator is the required percentage.

Multiply the numerator and denominator by 5.

7⋅5/20⋅5=35100

The numerator of the fraction with denominator 100 is the required percentage.

7/20=35%

Writing the fraction as a percentage, we get 35%.

Practice Problems For Go Math Grade 6 Exercise 8.2 Understanding Percents

Go Math Grade 6 Exercise 8.2: Understanding Percents Solutions Page 52 Exercise 16 Answer

Given: – The given fraction is 1/5.

We have to express the fraction as a percentage.

Multiplying the numerator and denominator with a number that can make the denominator equal to 100.

The corresponding numerator is the required percentage.

Multiply the numerator and denominator with 20.

1⋅20/5⋅20=20/100

The numerator of the fraction with denominator 100 is the required percentage.

1/5=20%

Writing the fraction as a percentage, we get 20%.

Page 52 Exercise 17 Answer

Given: – The given fraction is 1/8.

We have to express the fraction as a percentage.

Multiplying the numerator and denominator with a number that can make the denominator equal to 100.

The corresponding numerator is the required percentage.

Go Math! Practice Fluency Workbook Grade 6, California 1st Edition, Chapter 8 Percents17

The numerator of the fraction with denominator 100 is the required percentage.

1/8=12.5%

Writing the fraction as a percentage, we get 12.5%.

Page 52 Exercise 18 Answer

Given: The fraction is 3/25

To find: Express the fraction as a percent.Summary: To convert a fraction into a percent, we divide the numerator by the denominator.

Multiply the decimal with 100. Another way is to multiply the numerator and the denominator with some number so that the denominator becomes 100.

The corresponding numerator is the required percentage.

Multiply the numerator and the denominator with 4.

3×4/25×4=12/100

The numerator of the fraction with denominator 100 is the required percentage.

3/25=12%

We can write the fraction 3/25 as 12%.

Go Math Grade 6 Exercise 8.2: Understanding Percents Solutions Page 52 Exercise 19 Answer

Given: The fraction is 3/4

To find: Express the fraction as a percent.Summary: To convert a fraction into a percent, we divide the numerator by the denominator.

Multiply the decimal thus obtained with 100.

Divide the numerator by the denominator.

3/4=0.75

Multiply the decimal with 100.

​0.75×100=75

3/4=75%

​We can write the fraction 3/4 as 75%.

Page 52 Exercise 20 Answer

Given: The fraction is 23/50.

To find: Express the fraction as a percent.

Summary: We can convert a fraction into a percent, by first dividing the numerator by the denominator and then multiplying the decimal with 100.

Another way is to multiply the numerator and the denominator with some number so that the denominator becomes 100, and the numerator is the percentage.

Multiply the numerator and the denominator with 2.

23×2/50×2=46/100

The numerator of the fraction with denominator 100 is the required percentage.

23/50=46%

Converting the fraction into percentage we get, 23/50

=46%.

Page 52 Exercise 21 Answer

Given: The fraction is 11/20.

To find: Express the fraction as a percent.

Summary: To convert a fraction into a percent, we divide the numerator by the denominator.

Multiply 100 to the decimal. Or else, multiply the numerator and the denominator with some number so that the denominator becomes 100.

And the corresponding numerator is the required percentage.

Multiply the numerator and the denominator with 5.

11×5/20×5=55/100.

The numerator of the fraction with denominator as 100 is the percentage.

11/20=55%.

Go Math Grade 6 Exercise 8.2: Understanding Percents Solutions Page 52 Exercise 22 Answer

Given: The fraction is 43/50

To find: Express the fraction as a percent.

Summary: First we divide the numerator by the denominator. Multiply the decimal with 100.

Another way is to multiply the numerator and the denominator with some number so that the denominator becomes 100.

Then the corresponding numerator becomes the required percentage.

Multiply the numerator and the denominator with 2.

43×2/50×2=86/100.

The numerator of the fraction with denominator as 100 is the required percentage.

43/50=86%.

Converting the fraction into percentage, we get, 43/50=86%.

Page 52 Exercise 23 Answer

Given: The fraction is 24/25

To find: Express the fraction as a percent.Summary: In order to convert a fraction into a percent, divide the numerator by the denominator.

Multiply the decimal with 100. Alternate way is to multiply the numerator and the denominator with some number so that the denominator becomes 100, so that the corresponding numerator is the required percentage.

Multiply both numerator and the denominator with 4.

24×4/25×4=96/100.

The required percentage is the numerator of the fraction with denominator as 100.

24/25=96%.

Converting the fraction to the percentage we get,

24/25=96%.

Step-By-Step Solutions For Go Math Grade 6 Understanding Percents Exercise 8.2

Go Math Grade 6 Exercise 8.2: Understanding Percents Solutions Page 52 Exercise 24 Answer

Given: The fraction is 7/8.

To find: Express the fraction as a percent.

Summary: To convert a fraction into a percent, first we divide the numerator by the denominator.

Then multiply the decimal with 100. Another way is to multiply the numerator and the denominator with some number so that the denominator becomes 100.

The corresponding numerator is the required percentage.

Divide the numerator by the denominator.

7/8=0.875

Multiply the decimal with 100.

0.875×100=87.5

7/8=87.5%.

We can write the given fraction 7/8 as 87.5%

Go Math Answer Key

 

Go Math Grade 6 Exercise 8.1: Understanding Percents Solutions

Go Math! Practice Fluency Workbook Grade 6 California 1st Edition Chapter 8 Percents

Page 49 Problem 1 Answer

Given:- We have30%

To Find:- Write each percent as a fraction in simplest form and as a decimal to the nearest hundredth.

Go Math! Practice Fluency Workbook Grade 6, California 1st Edition, Chapter 8 Percents 1

30% can be written in simplest form as 3/10 and in decimal form will be 0.3.

Page 49 Problem 2 Answer

Given:- We have 42%.

To Find:- Write each percent as a fraction in simplest form and as a decimal to the nearest hundredth.

Go Math! Practice Fluency Workbook Grade 6, California 1st Edition, Chapter 8 Percents 2

42% can be written in the simplest form as 21/50 and in the decimal form it will be 0.42.

Go Math! Practice Fluency Workbook Grade 6 Chapter 8 Percents Exercise 8.1 Answer Key

Go Math Grade 6 Exercise 8.1 Understanding Percents Solutions

Go Math Grade 6 Exercise 8.1: Understanding Percents Solutions Page 49 Problem 3 Answer

Given:- We have 18%.

To Find:- Write each percent as a fraction in simplest form and as a decimal to the nearest hundredth.

Go Math! Practice Fluency Workbook Grade 6, California 1st Edition, Chapter 8 Percents 3

18% can be written in simplest form as 9/50 and in the decimal form will be 0.18.

Page 49 Problem 4 Answer

Given:- We have 35%.

To Find:- Write each percent as a fraction in simplest form and as a decimal to the nearest hundredth.

Go Math! Practice Fluency Workbook Grade 6, California 1st Edition, Chapter 8 Percents 4

35% can be written in the simplest form as 7/20 and in decimal 0.35.

Page 49 Problem 5 Answer

Given;- We have 100 %.

To Find:- Write each percent as a fraction in simplest form and as a decimal to the nearest hundredth.

The simplest form of 100% is1/1 and the decimal form is1.00

Go Math Grade 6 Exercise 8.1: Understanding Percents Solutions Page 49 Problem 6 Answer

Given:- We have 29 %.

To Find:- Write each percent as a fraction in simplest form and as a decimal to the nearest hundredth.

Go Math! Practice Fluency Workbook Grade 6, California 1st Edition, Chapter 8 Percents 6

The simplest form of 29%  is 29/100 and in decimal, it will be represented as 0.29.

Page 49 Problem 7 Answer

Given:- We have 56%

To Find:- Write each percent as a fraction in simplest form and as a decimal to the nearest hundredth.

Go Math! Practice Fluency Workbook Grade 6, California 1st Edition, Chapter 8 Percents 7

Simplest form of 56% is 14/25 and in the decimal form 0.56.

Page 49 Problem 8 Answer

Given: There is a given equation 66×2/3%

Find: Write each percent as a fraction in simplest form and as a decimal to the nearest hundredth. Approach: Here, A percent is a portion of 100

so to write a percent as a fraction, Write the percent in the numerator and 100 in the denominator.

A percent is a portion of 100 so to write a percent as a fraction, write the percent in the numerator and 100 in the denominator. Then reduce if possible:

Go Math! Practice Fluency Workbook Grade 6, California 1st Edition, Chapter 8 Percents 8 1

To write 66×2/3% as a decimal, we need to convert 2/3 to decimal form by dividing 2 and 3.

Go Math! Practice Fluency Workbook Grade 6, California 1st Edition, Chapter 8 Percents 8 2

Since we need to round to the nearest hundredth, divide up to 3 decimal places:

Rounding to the nearest hundredth then gives 66×2/3%≈0.67.

Go Math Grade 6 Exercise 8.1 Understanding Percents Answers

Page 49 Problem 9 Answer

Given: The given equation is 25%

Find: Here, percent as a fraction in simplest form and as a decimal to the nearest hundredth.

Approach: So to write a percent as a fraction, write the percent in the numerator and 100 in the denominator.

A percent is a portion of 100 so to write a percent as a fraction, write the percent in the numerator and 100 in the denominator. Then reduce if possible:

Go Math! Practice Fluency Workbook Grade 6, California 1st Edition, Chapter 8 Percents 9

Since 25/100 = 0.25, then 25% as a decimal is 0.25 1/4=​0.25

Go Math Grade 6 Exercise 8.1: Understanding Percents Solutions Page 49 Problem 10 Answer

Given: The equation is 0.03

Find: Write each decimal or fraction as a percent. Approach: we need to first write the decimal as a fraction that has a denominator of 100.

The percent is then the numerator of the fraction,

A percent is a portion of 100 so to write a decimal as a percent, we need to first write the decimal as a fraction that has a denominator of 100.

The percent is then the numerator of the fraction: ​0.03=3/100=3%

The percent is then the numerator of the fraction,3%

Page 49 Problem 11 Answer

Given: The given percent is 0.92

Find: Write each decimal or fraction as a percent. Approach: A percent is a portion of 100

so to write a decimal as a percent, we need to first write the decimal as a fraction that has a denominator of 100.

A percent is a portion of 100 so to write a decimal as a percent, we need to first write the decimal as a fraction that has a denominator of 100.

The percent is then the numerator of the fraction: ​0.92=92/100=92%

The percent is then the numerator of the fraction,92%

Page 49 Problem 12 Answer

Given: The equation show percent 0.18
Find: Write each decimal or fraction as a percent. so to write a decimal as a percent approach: We need to first write the decimal as a fraction that has a denominator of 100.

The percent is then the numerator of the fraction. A percent is a portion of 100

so to write a decimal as a percent, we need to first write the decimal as a fraction that has a denominator of 100.

The percent is then the numerator of the fraction: ​0.18=18/100=18%

The percent is then the numerator of the fraction,18%

Page 49 Problem 13 Answer

Given: The equation given percent is 2/5

Find: Here, decimal or fraction as a percent. Approach: We first need to find an equivalent fraction that has a denominator of 100.

A percent is a portion of 100 so to write a fraction as a percent, we first need to find an equivalent fraction that has a denominator of 100.

The percent is then the numerator of the equivalent fraction:

Go Math! Practice Fluency Workbook Grade 6, California 1st Edition, Chapter 8 Percents 13

The percent is then the numerator of the equivalent fraction,40%

Solutions For Go Math Grade 6 Exercise 8.1 Understanding Percents

Go Math Grade 6 Exercise 8.1: Understanding Percents Solutions Page 49 Problem 14 Answer

Given: here equation shows the percent 23/25

Find: Write each decimal or fraction as a percent. Approach: write a fraction as a percent, we first need to find an equivalent fraction that has a denominator of 100.

A percent is a portion of 100 so to write a fraction as a percent, we first need to find an equivalent fraction that has a denominator of 100.

The percent is then the numerator of the equivalent fraction:

Go Math! Practice Fluency Workbook Grade 6, California 1st Edition, Chapter 8 Percents 14

The percent is then the numerator of the equivalent fraction,92%

Page 49 Problem 15 Answer

Given: Here we have given that the percent is 7/10

Find: Write each decimal or fraction as a percent. Approach: A percent is a portion of 100

so to write a fraction as a percent, We first need to find an equivalent fraction.

A percent is a portion of 100 so to write a fraction as a percent, we first need to find an equivalent fraction that has a denominator of 100.

The percent is then the numerator of the equivalent fraction:

Go Math! Practice Fluency Workbook Grade 6, California 1st Edition, Chapter 8 Percents 15

The percent is then the numerator of the equivalent fraction, 70%

Page 49 Problem 16 Answer

Given: Bradley completed 3/5 of his homework.

Find: What percent of his homework does he still need to complete? Approach: It is given that Bradley has completed 0/5 his homework and we need to find what percent he has left to complete.

A percent is a portion of 100 so to write a fraction as a percent, we first need to find an equivalent fraction that has a denominator of 100.

The percent is then the numerator of the equivalent fraction:

Go Math! Practice Fluency Workbook Grade 6, California 1st Edition, Chapter 8 Percents 16

Since he has completed 60%, then he has 100%−60%=40% left to complete. 40%

Go Math Grade 6 Exercise 8.1: Understanding Percents Solutions Page 49 Problem 17 Answer

Given: After reading a book for English class, 100 students were asked whether or not they enjoyed it.

Nine twenty-fifths of the class did not like the book.Find: How many students liked the book? Approach: It is given that 100 students were asked whether or not they enjoyed a book and nine twenty-fifths.

It is given that 100 students were asked whether or not they enjoyed a book and nine twenty-fifths, which is the fraction 9/25

said they did not like the book. We need to find the number of students who did like the book.

First, we can use the given fraction to find the number of students who did not like the book:

Go Math! Practice Fluency Workbook Grade 6, California 1st Edition, Chapter 8 Percents 17

36 students did not like the book, then 100−36=64 students did like the book.

Page 49 Problem 18 Answer

Given: At a concert, 20% of the people are wearing black dresses or suits, 1/4 are wearing navy, 0.35 are wearing brown, and the rest are wearing a variety of colors (other).

Find: Write the percent, fraction, and decimal for each color of clothing. Approach: It is given that 20% wore black, 1/4 wore navy, 0.35 wore brown, and the rest wore other colors.

Go Math! Practice Fluency Workbook Grade 6, California 1st Edition, Chapter 8 Percents 18

It is given that 20% wore black, 1/4

wore navy, 0.35 wore brown, and the rest wore other colors. We need to write the percent, fraction, and decimal for each color of clothing. Black

Other To find the percent, we must first find the combined percent for black, navy, and brown. Adding the percentages gives 20%+25%+35%=80%.

Go Math! Practice Fluency Workbook Grade 6, California 1st Edition, Chapter 8 Percents 18

The percent for others is then 100%−80%=20%.

Go Math! Practice Fluency Workbook Grade 6, California 1st Edition, Chapter 8 Percents 18 2

Since Other and Black have the same percent, they must also have the same fraction and decimal. The fraction and decimal for Other is then 1/5 and 0.2.

Go Math Grade 6 Exercise 8.1: Understanding Percents Solutions Page 50 Exercise 1 Answer

Given: The percent gives as 43%

Find: Here, percent as a fraction in the simplest form. Approach: We can write a fraction with the percent as the numerator and 100 as the denominator.

A percent is a portion of 100 so to write a percent as a fraction, we can write a fraction with the percent as the numerator and 100 as the denominator.

Then we can reduce if possible: 43%=43/100

Simplest form of the percentage is 43/100

Page 50 Exercise 2 Answer

Given: Here, we have given percent of the equation 72% Find: Here, Each percent is a fraction in simplest form.

Approach: A percent is a portion of 100 so writing a percent as a fraction.

A percent is a portion of 100 so to write a percent as a fraction, we can write a fraction with the percent as the numerator and 100 as the denominator.

Then we can reduce if possible:

Go Math! Practice Fluency Workbook Grade 6, California 1st Edition, Chapter 8 Percents e2

Simplest form of the percentage is 18/25

Page 50 Exercise 3 Answer

Given: Here, we have given percent is 88%

Find: Write each percent as a fraction in the simplest form.Approach: write a fraction with the percent as the numerator and 100 as the denominator.

A percent is a portion of 100 so to write a percent as a fraction, we can write a fraction with the percent as the numerator and 100 as the denominator.

Then we can reduce if possible:

Go Math! Practice Fluency Workbook Grade 6, California 1st Edition, Chapter 8 Percents e3

Simplest form of the percentage is=22/25

Go Math Grade 6 Understanding Percents Exercise 8.1 Key

Go Math Grade 6 Exercise 8.1: Understanding Percents Solutions Page 50 Exercise 4 Answer

Given: We have the percent of the equation is 35%

Find: Write each percent as a fraction in the simplest form.

Approach: A percent is a portion of 100 so to write a percent as a fraction, we can write a fraction.

A percent is a portion of 100 so to write a percent as a fraction, we can write a fraction with the percent as the numerator and 100 as the denominator.

Then we can reduce if possible:

Go Math! Practice Fluency Workbook Grade 6, California 1st Edition, Chapter 8 Percents e4

The simplest form of the percentage is 7/20

Page 50 Exercise 5 Answer

Given: The percent is given 64%

Find: Write each percent as a decimal. Approach: so to write a percent as a decimal, we can write a fraction with the percent as the numerator and 100 as the denominator.

A percent is a portion of 100 so to write a percent as a decimal, we can write a fraction with the percent as the numerator and 100 as the denominator.

Then write the fraction as a decimal: ​64%= 64/100 = 0.64

The simplest form of the percentage is 0.64

Page 50 Exercise 6 Answer

Given: Here, The given percent is 92%

Find: Here, Write each percent as a decimal. Approach: A percent is a portion of 100 so write a percent as a decimal.

A percent is a portion of 100 so to write a percent as a decimal, we can write a fraction with the percent as the numerator and 100 as the denominator.

Then write the fraction as a decimal: ​92% = 92/100 = 0.92

The simplest form of the percentage is 0.92

Go Math Grade 6 Exercise 8.1: Understanding Percents Solutions Page 50 Exercise 7 Answer

Given: Here, we have the percent is 73%

Find: Write each percent as a decimal. Approach: write a percent as a decimal, we can write a fraction with the percent as the numerator and 100 as the denominator.

A percent is a portion of 100 so to write a percent as a decimal, we can write a fraction with the percent as the numerator and 100 as the denominator.

Then write the fraction as a decimal: ​73% = 73/100 = 0.73

The simplest form of the percentage is 0.73

Page 50 Exercise 8 Answer

Given: Here, The percent is 33%

Find: Write each percent as a decimal. Approach: A percent is a portion of 100

so to write a percent as a decimal, We can write a fraction with the percent as the numerator and 100 as the denominator.

A percent is a portion of 100 so to write a percent as a decimal, we can write a fraction with the percent as the numerator and 100 as the denominator.

Then write the fraction as a decimal: ​33% = 33/100 = 0.33

The simplest form of the percentage is 0.33

Detailed Solutions For Go Math Grade 6 Exercise 8.1 Understanding Percents

Go Math Answer Key

 

Go Math Grade 6 Exercise 5.5: Operations with Decimals Solutions

Go Math! Practice Fluency Workbook Grade 6 California 1st Edition Chapter 5 Operations with Decimals

Page 33 Problem 1 Answer

Given: It is given that the four friends equally shared the cost of supplies for a picnic. The total cost of supplies is $12.40

To find: We have to find how much money each friend paid.We will find the money each person paid by dividing the total cost by four.

Firstly, we will remove the decimal point from the denominator of the division expression by multiplying both the denominator and numerator by 10.

We have, 12.4/4 = 124/40

The division of the given cost by four is

Go Math! Practice Fluency Workbook Grade 6, California 1st Edition, Chapter 5 Operations with Decimals 1

Each friend has to pay $3.1

Page 33 Problem 2 Answer

Given: It is given that there are twenty people who are going to the movie by van. Each van seats eight people.

To find: We have to find the total number of vans required. We will divide twenty by eight to get the answer.

The division of the given data is

Go Math! Practice Fluency Workbook Grade 6, California 1st Edition, Chapter 5 Operations with Decimals 2

As there can not be a half van. So, three vans should be available.

The total number of vans required for twenty people is 3

Go Math! Practice Fluency Workbook Grade 6 Chapter 5 Operations with Decimals Exercise 5.5 Answer Key

Page 33 Problem 3 Answer

Given: It is given that we need forty forks and they come in packs of six.To find: We have to find how many packs do we need to buy.We will divide forty by six to get the answer.

The division is

Go Math! Practice Fluency Workbook Grade 6, California 1st Edition, Chapter 5 Operations with Decimals 3

As packs must be in whole numbers, so seven packs should be baught.

The number of packs we need to buy if we need forty forks is7

Go Math Grade 6 Exercise 5.5 Operations With Decimals Solutions

Go Math Grade 6 Exercise 5.5: Operations with Decimals SolutionsPage 33 Problem 4 Answer

Given: It is given that Kesha spent a total of$9.60 on new shoelaces and each pair costs $1.20

To find: We have to find how many pairs did she buy. We will divide the total cost by the cost of one pair.

The pairs of shoelaces that she bought are ​9.60/1.20=96/12 =8

The total number of pairs of shoelaces that Kesha bought is 8

Page 33 Problem 5 Answer

Given: It is given that one inch equals 1/4

hand and average Clydesdale is 17×1/5 hands tall. To find: We have to find the height of the horse in inches and in feet.

We will convert the height of Clydesdale in inches with the help of the given relation and then convert it into feet.

We will convert mixed fractions into improper fractions. The height of Clydesdale is 17×1/5=86/5

We will convert this height in hands into height in inches. We get, 86/5×1/4=4.3in

Now, the height in feet is 4.3×1/12=0.3583ft

The height of the horse in inches is 4.3in

The height of the horse in feet is 0.3583ft

Go Math Grade 6 Exercise 5.5: Operations with Decimals Solutions Page 33 Problem 6 Answer

Given: It is given that the banana bread recipe contains 3/4

cup of butter and one tablespoon equals 1/16 cup. To find: We have to find the number of tablespoons of butter needed.

We will divide the total cup of butter required by the butter that one tablespoon contains.

As we want to divide the fractions, we will rewrite the division as multiplication by reciprocating the divisor. We get, 3/4×16=12

The number of tablespoons needed is 12

Page 33 Problem 7 Answer

Given: It is given that Cindy earns $5.75 per hour. She works 12.4 hours per week. She worked50 weeks in a year.

To find: We have to find how much she earned in a year. We will find this by multiplying the pay per hour by the total number of hours per year.

We will first calculate the total number of hours in a year.

We get,12.4×50=620 The total income that she earned in a year is 5.75×620=3565

The total earnings of Cindy per year are$3565

Go Math Grade 6 Exercise 5.5 Operations With Decimals Answers

Go Math Grade 6 Exercise 5.5: Operations with Decimals Solutions Page 33 Problem 8 Answer

Given: Joey scored 9.4,9.7,9.9,9.8 and Carlos scored 9.5,9.2,9.7,9.6

To find who’s average is high. Using the method of average.

To find the average of Joey’s score average = sum of all the numbers / Total numbers

Now to find the average for Carlos’s score,

Go Math! Practice Fluency Workbook Grade 6, California 1st Edition, Chapter 5 Operations with Decimals 8 1

The average score of Joey’s is 9.7 and the average score of Carlos’s is 9.5 from this it is clear that the average score of Joey’s is higher than the score of Carlos.

Go Math! Practice Fluency Workbook Grade 6, California 1st Edition, Chapter 5 Operations with Decimals 8 2

Go Math Grade 6 Exercise 5.5: Operations with Decimals Solutions Page 33 Problem 9 Answer

Given: granola recipe calls for2x1/3

cup of almonds. A bag of almonds contains 2 cups. Ali buys 5 bags of almonds. To find how many cups of almonds will he have left over.

Using the method of multiplication. It is given that a granola recipe calls for 21/3

cups of almonds, each bag of almonds contain2 cups, Ali will make 21/2 batches of granola, and he bought 5bags of almonds.

First, we need to find how many cups of almonds he needs by multiplying the number of cups in each batch and the number of batches he will make,

=2×1/2×2×1/3=35/6  write in mixed fractions,

=5×5/6

To find how many cups are left, we can then subtract the number of cups he bought and the total number of cups he needs,

=10−5×5/6 simplify, = 4×1/6

There are 4×1/6 cups of almonds are left over.

Next, we need to find how many cups he bought by multiplying the number of cups in each bag and the number of bags he bought. He the bought2×5=10 cups of almonds.

Solutions For Go Math Grade 6 Exercise 5.5 Operations With Decimals

Go Math Grade 6 Exercise 5.5: Operations with Decimals Solutions Page 33 Problem 10 Answer

Given: three pandas eat a total of 181×1/2 pounds of bamboo shoot each day.

The male panda eats 3 times as much as the baby and the female panda eats 2 times as much as the baby.

To find how many pounds does the female panda eats. Using the method of division.

It is given that 3 pandas at a zoo each a total of 181×1/2 pounds of bamboo each day, the male eats 3 times as much as the baby, and the female eats 2 times as much as the baby.

Using the given information, we then get the ratio, male: female: baby=3:2:1

To find how much the female panda eats, we first need to write the ratio of females: all 3 pandas.

Since3+2+1=6, then the ratio is,female: all 3 pandas = 2:6

Reducing this ratio by dividing both numbers by 2 gives: female: all3 pandas2:6=2/6 simplify, =1/3

Now we need to write an equivalent ratio that has 181×1/2 = 363/2 as the second number in the ratio.

The female panda eats 60×1/2 pounds of the bamboo shoot aday.

Go Math Grade 6 Exercise 5.5: Operations with Decimals Solutions Page 34 Exercise 1 Answer

Given: Jan has $37.50 and the cost of one ticket is $5.25

To find how many tickets can Jan buy with the amount he has.Using the method of division.

Jan has $37.50 and the cost of one ticket is $5.25  to find how many tickets can he buy with the amount he has, here we should divide the total amount by the cost of one ticket because we are going to find the number of tickets can buy with the total amount so division takes place here.

Now divide the total amount by the cost of one ticket,

Go Math! Practice Fluency Workbook Grade 6, California 1st Edition, Chapter 5 Operations with Decimals e1

Jan can buy 7 tickets with the $37.05 money.

Go Math Grade 6 Exercise 5.5: Operations with Decimals Solutions Page 34 Exercise 2 Answer

Given: Jon has $45.00 and he plans to spend 4/3 of his money on sports equipment.To find how much will he spend.Using the method of multiplication.

It is given that Jon has $ 45 and plans to spend 4/5 of his money on sports equipment.

Go Math! Practice Fluency Workbook Grade 6, California 1st Edition, Chapter 5 Operations with Decimals e2

Since we know the total amount of money he has and what fraction of the total he will spend on sports equipment, we need to multiply to find how much he will spend.

Go Math Grade 6 Operations With Decimals Exercise 5.5 Key

Go Math Grade 6 Exercise 5.5: Operations with Decimals Solutions Page 34 Exercise 3 Answer

Given: Ricki has $ 76.8 feet of cable. She plans to cut it into 7 pieces.To find the length of each cable. Using the method of division.

It is given that Ricki has 76.8 feet of cable and will cut it into 7 pieces.

Since we know the total length and how many pieces it will be cut into, we need to divide to find the length of each piece.

Dividing 76.8 and 7 up to 3 decimal place gives = 76.8/7 divide, =10.971

Go Math! Practice Fluency Workbook Grade 6, California 1st Edition, Chapter 5 Operations with Decimals e4

Rounding to the nearest hundredth gives 10.97 so each piece will be about 10.97ft.

The length of the cable is 10.97 ft long.

Go Math Grade 6 Exercise 5.5: Operations with Decimals Solutions Page 34 Exercise 4 Answer

Given: Roger has 2×1/2 cups of butter. The recipe for the loaf of bread requires 3/4 cup of butter.

To find how many loaves can Roger make. Using the method of division.

It is given that Rogger has2x1/2 cups of butter and each recipe for a loaf of bread calls for3/4 cups of butter.

Since we know the total amount of butter he has and how much is needed for each loaf, we need to divide to find how many loaves he can make.

Roger can make 3 loaves of bread with the butter.

Go Math Grade 6 Exercise 5.5 Detailed Solutions

Go Math Answer Key